Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 331

Printed Documentation

2012

User Guide

All rights reserved 2012 ElectroMagneticWorks Inc.


8300 St-Patrick, Suite 300, Montreal, H8N 2H1, Qc, CANADA - www.emworks.com - info@emworks.com - Phone: (514) 634 9797

Table of Contents
EMS Online User's Guide ..............................................................................................................................................1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................2
Conventions................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Access to Help............................................................................................................................................................ 4
What's New in EMS 2012...............................................................................................................................................5
What's New in EMS 2012 - Overview ......................................................................................................................... 5
New in User Interface .................................................................................................................................................6
New in Analysis .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
New in Meshing & Pre-Processing ........................................................................................................................... 10
New in Result Viewing .............................................................................................................................................. 11
Analysis Background.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Analysis Background ................................................................................................................................................ 13
About Maxwell's Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 14
What is Low Frequency Electromagnetics? .............................................................................................................. 15
Electrostatic Analysis................................................................................................................................................ 16
What is Electrostatic Analysis? ............................................................................................................................. 16
Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 18
Assigning a Voltage to a Conductor ...................................................................................................................... 19
Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 20
Required Input for Electrostatic Analysis .............................................................................................................. 21
Performing Electrostatic Analysis.......................................................................................................................... 22
Output of Electrostatic Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 23
Electric Conduction Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 24
What is Electric Conduction Analysis? .................................................................................................................. 24
Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 26

iii

EMS User Guide

Applicable Restraints ............................................................................................................................................ 27


Resistance Calculation ......................................................................................................................................... 28
Required Input for Electric Conduction Analysis ................................................................................................... 29
Performing Electric Conduction Analysis .............................................................................................................. 30
Output of Electric Conduction Analysis ................................................................................................................. 31
Magnetostatic Analysis ............................................................................................................................................. 32
What is Magnetostatic Analysis? .......................................................................................................................... 32
Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 34
Applicable Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 35
Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 36
Required Input for Magnetostatic Analysis ............................................................................................................ 37
Performing Magnetostatic Analysis ....................................................................................................................... 38
Output of Magnetostatic Analysis.......................................................................................................................... 39
AC Magnetic Analysis............................................................................................................................................... 40
What is AC Magnetic Analysis? ............................................................................................................................ 40
Skin Depth Calculation .......................................................................................................................................... 42
Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 43
Applicable Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 44
Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 45
Required Input for AC Magnetic Analysis ............................................................................................................. 46
Performing AC Magnetic Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 47
Output of AC Magnetic Analysis ........................................................................................................................... 48
Transient Magnetic Analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 50
What is Transient Magnetic Analysis? .................................................................................................................. 50
Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 52
Applicable Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 54
Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 55
iv

Table of Contents

Required Input for Transient Magnetic Analysis .................................................................................................... 56


Performing Transient Magnetic Analysis ............................................................................................................... 57
Output of Transient Magnetic Analysis ................................................................................................................. 58
Thermal Analysis ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
What is Thermal Analysis?.................................................................................................................................... 60
Performing Thermal Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 61
Output of Thermal Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 62
Mechanisms of Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................................... 63
Motion Analysis ........................................................................................................................................................ 74
What Is Motion Analysis? ...................................................................................................................................... 74
Performing Motion Analysis .................................................................................................................................. 75
Output of Motion Analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 80
EMS Fundamentals...................................................................................................................................................... 81
EMS Fundamentals .................................................................................................................................................. 81
Benefits of Analysis .................................................................................................................................................. 82
Basic Concepts of Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 83
EMS Manager Tree .................................................................................................................................................. 85
Design Studies ......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Using Design Studies ............................................................................................................................................ 86
Analysis Steps .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................... 88
Restraints and Loads................................................................................................................................................ 89
Specifying Directions ................................................................................................................................................ 90
Coordinate Systems .............................................................................................................................................. 90
Coils or Electromagnets ........................................................................................................................................... 91
Air Modeling.............................................................................................................................................................. 92
Air truncation ......................................................................................................................................................... 92
v

EMS User Guide

How far is the air region? ...................................................................................................................................... 92


Air meshing ........................................................................................................................................................... 92
An exception ......................................................................................................................................................... 92
Meshing .................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Running Studies ....................................................................................................................................................... 94
Viewing Results ........................................................................................................................................................ 95
Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................................................................. 96
The Global Coordinate System ............................................................................................................................. 96
Local Coordinate Systems .................................................................................................................................... 96
Result Databases ..................................................................................................................................................... 97
Working with Assemblies .......................................................................................................................................... 98
About Units ............................................................................................................................................................... 99
Languages .............................................................................................................................................................. 100
EMS Interface ............................................................................................................................................................ 101
EMS Interface Components.................................................................................................................................... 101
EMS Manager Tree ................................................................................................................................................ 102
EMS Manager Tree ............................................................................................................................................. 102
EMS Manager Tree Conventions ........................................................................................................................ 103
Define Study Name ............................................................................................................................................. 104
Drag and Drop Functionality ............................................................................................................................... 105
Toolbars ................................................................................................................................................................. 106
EMS Toolbars ..................................................................................................................................................... 106
Design Studies ........................................................................................................................................................... 109
Design Studies ....................................................................................................................................................... 109
Concept of Design Studies ..................................................................................................................................... 110
Study Types............................................................................................................................................................ 111
Element Types........................................................................................................................................................ 112
vi

Table of Contents

Study ...................................................................................................................................................................... 113


EMS Analysis Options ............................................................................................................................................ 114
Electrostatic Analysis Options ............................................................................................................................. 115
Electric Conduction Analysis Options ................................................................................................................. 116
Magnetostatic Analysis Options .......................................................................................................................... 117
AC Magnetic Analysis Options ............................................................................................................................ 118
Transient Magnetic Analysis Options .................................................................................................................. 119
EMS Matrix Solvers ................................................................................................................................................ 120
Multiple Studies ...................................................................................................................................................... 121
Activating a SolidWorks Configuration .................................................................................................................... 122
Modifying the Properties of a Study ........................................................................................................................ 123
Deleting a Study ..................................................................................................................................................... 124
Running a Study ..................................................................................................................................................... 125
Material Information ................................................................................................................................................... 127
Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................. 127
Material Properties Used in EMS ............................................................................................................................ 128
Material Models ...................................................................................................................................................... 130
Linear Materials .................................................................................................................................................. 130
Nonlinear Materials ............................................................................................................................................. 130
Isotropic Materials ............................................................................................................................................... 130
Orthotropic Materials ........................................................................................................................................... 130
Defining Orthotropic Properties For Solids .......................................................................................................... 130
About Permanent Magnets ..................................................................................................................................... 132
The B-H Curve of a Material ................................................................................................................................... 135
Assigning Materials to your Model .......................................................................................................................... 136
Creating or Inserting a Materials Library ................................................................................................................. 137
Adding a Material to an Existing Library ................................................................................................................. 138
vii

EMS User Guide

Assigning a B-H Curve to a Material....................................................................................................................... 139


Assigning a Permanent Magnet.............................................................................................................................. 140
Assigning an Orthotropic Material........................................................................................................................... 141
Using Drag and Drop to Define Materials ............................................................................................................... 142
Function Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... 143
About Function Curves ........................................................................................................................................... 143
Creating or Editing a Curve Library ........................................................................................................................ 144
Viewing a Curve Library ......................................................................................................................................... 145
Loads and Restraints ................................................................................................................................................. 147
Loads and Restraints .............................................................................................................................................. 147
Fixed Voltage.......................................................................................................................................................... 148
Floating Conductor ................................................................................................................................................. 149
Contact Resistance ................................................................................................................................................ 150
Charge Density ....................................................................................................................................................... 151
Total Charge ........................................................................................................................................................... 152
Normal Flux ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Modifying Loads and Restraints ............................................................................................................................ 154
Thermal Loads & Restraints ................................................................................................................................... 155
Temperature ....................................................................................................................................................... 155
Convection .......................................................................................................................................................... 156
Heat Flux............................................................................................................................................................. 157
Volume Heat ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
Summary of Loads and Restraints ......................................................................................................................... 159
Coils ........................................................................................................................................................................... 161
About Coils ............................................................................................................................................................. 161
Wound and Solid Coils ........................................................................................................................................... 162
Magnetostatic Study ........................................................................................................................................... 162
viii

Table of Contents

AC and Transient Magnetic Studies .................................................................................................................... 162


Coil Properties ........................................................................................................................................................ 163
Net Current ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
Entry and Exit Ports ............................................................................................................................................ 163
Loops or closed Coils .......................................................................................................................................... 163
Current-Time Curve ................................................................................................................................................ 165
Adding a Coil .......................................................................................................................................................... 166
Adding a Coil to Magnetostatic study ..................................................................................................................... 167
Adding a Coil to an AC Magnetic Study .................................................................................................................. 168
Adding a Coil to a Transient Magnetic Study .......................................................................................................... 170
Modifying a Coil ...................................................................................................................................................... 172
Summary of Coils ................................................................................................................................................... 173
Forces and Torques ................................................................................................................................................... 177
About Forces and Torques ..................................................................................................................................... 177
The Lorentz Force Method .................................................................................................................................. 178
The Virtual Work Method .................................................................................................................................... 178
The Maxwell Stress Method ................................................................................................................................ 179
Force Computation Methods .................................................................................................................................. 180
The Lorentz Force Method .................................................................................................................................. 180
The Virtual Work Method .................................................................................................................................... 180
The Maxwell Stress Method ................................................................................................................................ 181
Computing a Force/Torque ..................................................................................................................................... 182
Modifying a Force/Torque ....................................................................................................................................... 183
Summary of Forces/Torques .................................................................................................................................. 184
Resistance ................................................................................................................................................................. 185
About Resistance ................................................................................................................................................... 185
Computing a Resistance ........................................................................................................................................ 186
ix

EMS User Guide

Modifying a Resistance Set .................................................................................................................................... 187


Capacitance ............................................................................................................................................................... 189
Computing Capacitance Matrix............................................................................................................................... 189
Circuit Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................... 191
Computing Circuit Parameters................................................................................................................................ 191
Meshing ..................................................................................................................................................................... 193
Background on Meshing ......................................................................................................................................... 193
Meshing Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 194
Rebuilding the Mesh ............................................................................................................................................... 195
Automatic Looping .................................................................................................................................................. 196
Meshing Options..................................................................................................................................................... 197
Mesh ....................................................................................................................................................................... 198
Controlling the Mesh ............................................................................................................................................... 199
Mesh Control Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 199
Mesh Control Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 200
Mesh Control Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 201
Failure Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................................. 202
Meshing Tips .......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Viewing Results.......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Viewing Analysis Results ........................................................................................................................................ 205
Compare Studies Results ....................................................................................................................................... 206
Plotting Results....................................................................................................................................................... 208
Plotting Results ................................................................................................................................................... 208
Electric Potential Plot .......................................................................................................................................... 210
Electric Field Plot ................................................................................................................................................ 211
Electric Displacement Plot .................................................................................................................................. 212
Current Density Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 213
x

Table of Contents

Magnetic Flux Density Plot.................................................................................................................................. 214


Magnetic Field Plot ............................................................................................................................................. 215
Applied Current Density Plot ............................................................................................................................... 216
Current Density Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 217
Force Density Plot............................................................................................................................................... 218
Losses Density Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 219
Compute Flux...................................................................................................................................................... 220
Compute Voltage ................................................................................................................................................ 221
Thermal Plotting Results ..................................................................................................................................... 222
Summary of Plots................................................................................................................................................ 225
Graphing Results .................................................................................................................................................... 226
Graphing Results ................................................................................................................................................ 226
Graphing of Probed Result Plots ......................................................................................................................... 227
Graphing Results on a Line Segment ................................................................................................................. 228
Manipulating Result Plots ....................................................................................................................................... 229
Processing Result Plots ...................................................................................................................................... 229
Editing a Result Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 230
Section ................................................................................................................................................................ 231
Iso Clipping ......................................................................................................................................................... 233
Animate 3D Plots ................................................................................................................................................ 234
3D Plot Listing ..................................................................................................................................................... 235
Chart Options ...................................................................................................................................................... 236
Printing Result Plots ............................................................................................................................................ 238
Saving Result Plots ............................................................................................................................................. 239
Renaming Plot .................................................................................................................................................... 240
Deleting a Result Plot ......................................................................................................................................... 241
Copying a Result Plot Between Studies .............................................................................................................. 242
xi

EMS User Guide

Adding a Plot Title ............................................................................................................................................... 243


Annotating Extreme Values on a Plot ................................................................................................................. 244
Customizing Plot Legend .................................................................................................................................... 245
Including User Information in a Plot .................................................................................................................... 246
Probing Results ...................................................................................................................................................... 247
Probing Results................................................................................................................................................... 247
Point Probing ...................................................................................................................................................... 248
Spline Probing..................................................................................................................................................... 249
Probe .................................................................................................................................................................. 250
Study Reports ............................................................................................................................................................ 251
Study Reports ......................................................................................................................................................... 251
Report ..................................................................................................................................................................... 252
Generating a Report ............................................................................................................................................... 253
Setting the Cover Page .......................................................................................................................................... 254
Setting Introduction................................................................................................................................................. 255
Setting Description ................................................................................................................................................. 256
Setting Model View ................................................................................................................................................. 257
Setting Conclusion.................................................................................................................................................. 258
EMS Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 259
System Options - General ...................................................................................................................................... 259
What's Wrong Messages .................................................................................................................................... 259
Mesh colors......................................................................................................................................................... 259
Result plots ......................................................................................................................................................... 259
System Options - Default Library ............................................................................................................................ 260
Default Options (New Study) - Units ....................................................................................................................... 261
Symbol Settings-Default Options ............................................................................................................................ 262
Symbol quality..................................................................................................................................................... 262
xii

Table of Contents

Default Options (New Study) - Load/Restraint ........................................................................................................ 263


Symbol size......................................................................................................................................................... 263
Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 263
Resistance Set - Default Options (New Study) ....................................................................................................... 264
Symbol size......................................................................................................................................................... 264
Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 264
Coils - Default Options (New Study) ....................................................................................................................... 265
Symbol size......................................................................................................................................................... 265
Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 265
Force/Torque - Default Options (New Study).......................................................................................................... 266
Symbol size......................................................................................................................................................... 266
Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 266
Mesh Control - Default Options (New Study) .......................................................................................................... 267
Symbol size......................................................................................................................................................... 267
Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 267
Mesh - Default Options (New Study) ...................................................................................................................... 268
Element Growth Rate .......................................................................................................................................... 268
Accurate Curvature Representation .................................................................................................................... 268
Automatic Looping for solids ............................................................................................................................... 268
Default Options (New Study) - Results ................................................................................................................... 269
Results folder ...................................................................................................................................................... 269
Report folder ....................................................................................................................................................... 269
Default Options (New Study) - Plot ......................................................................................................................... 270
Annotation and range .......................................................................................................................................... 270
Settings options .................................................................................................................................................. 270
Font ..................................................................................................................................................................... 270
Default Options (New Study) - Color Chart ............................................................................................................. 271
xiii

EMS User Guide

Position ............................................................................................................................................................... 271


Width ................................................................................................................................................................... 271
Number format .................................................................................................................................................... 271
Color options ....................................................................................................................................................... 271
Default Options (New Study) - User information ..................................................................................................... 272
Support and Service................................................................................................................................................... 273
How to Contact Us?................................................................................................................................................ 273
Mailing Address ...................................................................................................................................................... 274
World Wide Web..................................................................................................................................................... 275
Index .......................................................................................................................................................................... 277

xiv

EMS Online User's Guide

EMS Online User's Guide


EMS2012 online help includes descriptions and instructions for all the
analysis features and capabilities of the EMS software.

What's New in EMS 2012


Read an overview of the new functionality in this software release and
learn how to access topics with more information.

EMS Fundamentals
Learn basic concepts and terminology used throughout the EMS
software.

EMS Reference
Electrostatic
Electric Conduction
Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Transient Magnetic
Design Studies

Material Properties
Function Curves
Loads and
Restraints

Coils
Forces and Torques
Resistance

Capacitance
Inductance
Meshing
Viewing Results
Study Reports
EMS Options

EMS User Guide

Overview

Welcome to the EMS Online User's Guide. This help includes


descriptions and instructions for all of the analysis features and
capabilities of the EMS software.
Conventions. Describes the font conventions and buttons used in help
Access to Help. Lists the ways to access the help, as well as helpful hints for

searching
Resources. Lists other EMS documents
What's New. Lists the new functionality in this software release as well as
links to other topics with more information

EMS 2012 requires SolidWorks 2012 version.

EMS Online User's Guide

Conventions
The help uses the following font and icon conventions:
bold - Indicates a user interface element such as a menu item,
tool tip, title of a dialog box, and so on.
italic green - Click to display more information. This shortens
long topics so you can quickly scan the information.

- Represents a note or a tip. It is not a link; the information


follows the icon. Notes and tips provide time-saving steps and
helpful hints.

EMS User Guide

Access to Help
You can access the EMS Online User's Guide in many ways,
including:

click Help, EMS Help Topics to open the default page.

Click Help, or click


in a dialog box or PropertyManager to access
context-sensitive help.

Once in the help, you can use the TOC, Index, or Search tab to
locate a topic. Here are some hints for using the Search tab:

Use wildcard characters to broaden your search.

Try to create Boolean searches by adding terms such as "AND", "OR",


"NOT", and "NEAR".
Select the Search previous results check box to use only the previously
found topics for the next search. This allows you to narrow down your search
by adding keywords.
Select the Match similar words check box to highlight similar words in the
found topics. For example, if you search for "open", topics with both "open"
and "opening" are found.
Select the Search titles only check box to find only topics where the
keyword is in the title.

What's New in EMS 2012

What's New in EMS 2012 - Overview


EMS 2012 is the sixth release of EMS as a Gold Certified add-in to
SolidWorks.
This is a major new release of the software and incorporates
several new features at the meshing/preprocessing, solving and
post-processing levels. New capabilities have been added in this
release to EMS's 5 solvers to provide users with more
comprehensive simulation options and a more complete set of
results. Materials and meshing have also been improved in this
release while post-processing now incorporates new functionality.
To access What's New topics, select a subject area from the Table
of Contents or follow the links:

What's
What's
What's
What's

New
New
New
New

User Interface
Meshing & Pre-Processing
Analysis
Result Viewing

EMS User Guide

New in User Interface

Tool tip added to EMS Feature manager tree


EMViewer License: Read-only license of EMS that enable user to view EMS results
without requiring a full license.

Results tables: results tables are now accessible directly through a single mouse click.

EMViewer License: This is a special license that allows users to open EMS studies, browse all settings, view
results and have full access to all post-processing operations without requiring a full EMS license. By default,
studies are opened in view-only mode, which allows users to modify existing plots,create new ones and generate
new reports. A read-only option, which does not allow any modifications is also available to users and can be
selected at the time of opening the study. The EMViewer does not allow users to create studies or run an analysis.

What's New in EMS 2012

New in Analysis
Electric Conduction Analyses

Motion Analysis : Motion with six degrees of freedom using


SolidWorks motion 2012.
user can run motion analysis and access motion results after a good run.
Exclude From Analysis: this feature enable the user to exclude an existant
component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the
excluded component.
Compute Capacitance: users will access computed capacitance results after
a good run.
Precision control: Users can now choose from three levels of precision,
Normal, High and Very High, when performing Electrostatic or Conduction
analyses. This feature helps users capture highly varying electric fields and
currents with increased precision.
True floating conductors: the floating conductor boundary condition is now
treated differently in EMS. Whereas the solver internally assigned a different
voltage (1 or 0) to each floating conductor in previous release, now it treats
floating conductors are equipotential bodies/surfaces with unknown potential
values to be computed. This approach is more realistic and accurate than
alternative options such as specifying a large permittivity to a conductor in
order to consider it truly floating.

Magnetostatic Analysis

Motion Analysis :Motion with six degrees of freedom using


SolidWorks motion 2012.
More accurate Transient-motion coupled solver.
Faster nonlinear Newton-Raphson solver.
Exclude From Analysis: this new feature enable the user to exclude an
existant component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the
excluded component.
Compute Circuit Parameters: users will access computed circuit parameters
results after a good run.
Coil Modeling: coil modeling in EMS is now substantially improved. Wound
coils can now be defined using the wire gage (using AWG standard sizes) or
the wire diameter.
Coil Excitation: in addition to the existing current driven coil excitation, a
voltage driven coil can now be defined. The external voltage sources
resistance can be specified.
Coil DC Resistance: the coils DC resistance is now accurately and
automatically computed based on the AWG/diameter specification.
Applied Current Density: the computation of the applied current density
distribution has been improved for wound coils to reflect its uniform nature
due to insulation between wires.
7

EMS User Guide

Normal Flux Boundary Condition: the use of the normal flux boundary
condition on an outer face, which was required for uniqueness of the solution,
in no longer necessary. EMS now uses a new technique based on the treecotree branch cuts to ensure solution uniqueness. The normal flux boundary
condition can still be used to applicable symmetry situations.

AC-Magnetic Analysis

Motion Analysis : Motion with six degrees of freedom using


SolidWorks motion 2012.
Faster nonlinear Newton-Raphson solver.
user can run motion analysis and access motion results after a good run.
Exclude From Analysis: this new feature enable the user to exclude an
existant component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the
excluded component.
Compute Circuit Parameters: users will access computed circuit parameters
results after a good run.
Split Core Loss: users will access computed losses results after a good run.
Coil Modeling: coil modeling in AC-Magnetic analysis has also been
enhanced to include AWG standard specs for wound coils.
Coil Excitation and Coupling to External Circuits: voltage driven coil can now
be defined along with an RLC external circuit.
Normal Flux Boundary Condition: the use of the normal flux boundary in ACMagnetic analysis has been modified as in the case of Magnetostatic
analysis.
Core Loss: all three components of core loss, i.e., Eddy, Hysteresis and
Excess losses, are now computed. Ohmic, Eddy, Hysteresis, Excess, and
Core losses are output to the results table for each component. Loss
density distributions can be viewed with EMSs standard visualization tools.
Loss Input: users have the option of importing manufacturers loss data
through a file or entering it manually using EMSs standard curve definition
interface. Alternatively, users can use Steinmetz loss model and specify the
proper coefficients for their material.
Lamination: users can now define laminated materials through EMSs
standard material editor. As with other EMS materials users can create, edit
and save their own laminated materials libraries.
New Computed Parameters: voltages, currents, impedance matrices,
coupling coefficients between coils and various loss terms. Leakage
inductance is also computed for two conductor systems.
Multiply Connected Conductor Regions: conductors with one or more holes
inside, i.e., multiply connected, require careful attention to obtain a unique
solution. EMS now uses an automatic and more efficient approach to solving
multiply connected regions that ensures solution uniqueness with speed and
accuracy.

Transient Analysis

Motion Analysis : Motion with six degrees of freedom using


SolidWorks motion 2012.
Faster nonlinear Newton-Raphson solver.
user can run motion analysis and access motion results after a good run.
Exclude From Analysis: this new feature enable the user to exclude an
existant component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the
excluded component.
Compute Circuit Parameters: users will access computed circuit parameters
results after a good run.

What's New in EMS 2012

Thermal Analysis : Fully embedded thermal simulation inside transient


magnetic model.
Coil Modeling, Coil Excitation and Normal Flux Boundary Condition: these
features are implemented in the Transient Analysis in similar manner to the
AC-Magnetic analysis.
Coil Excitation Functions: in addition to the existing curve-based excitation
definitions, users can now define excitation by functions. Implemented
functions include: sinusoidal, exponential, pulse and single frequency FM
(SFFM) current and voltage sources.
Non-linear Transient Solver: improved stability and convergence.

EMS User Guide

New in Meshing & Pre-Processing

10

Auto-insert Air part is not possible allowing to insert a box, sphere or cylinder in
the model : the inserted part will automatically include the required cavities to
avoid interference.
Automatic insertion of the required cavities to avoid interference.
Auto-apply Air to apply air to all solid bodies in the study where no material
has been applied.
3D Mesh Pre-processing: Visualize and analyze the 3D mesh before
launching the solver. Because meshing is critical to solution accuracy and
speed, EMS now provides users unparalleled mesh viewing capabilities. This
powerful feature allows users to visually inspect the mesh in a clear and
uncluttered manner before launching the solver. It includes probing, section
viewing and iso-clipping of the 3D mesh.
Improved Meshing: In addition to existing mesh controls on faces and
components, which already give users complete control over the meshing
process, new meshing features in EMS 2012 make meshing even faster and
more robust. A new way of computing global element size has been added
and mesh controls can now be applied to make the mesh coarser of finer.
These features increase the meshers robustness considerably so that users
will have more first time success in creating meshes.
Material Library: enhanced EMS built-in material library including many new
non-linear materials and material loss parameters.

What's New in EMS 2012

New in Result Viewing

Auto generation of 2D drawing of the model under study and including it in


the study report.
More control on motion results exporting allowing to select all time steps for
selected result or all results for selected time step.
New 2D plot of a selected 3D point over motion time steps.
2D plot of a selected parameters over transient time steps.
3D plot saving the plot view camera settings.
More control on transient results exporting allowing to select all time steps for
selected result or all results for selected time step.
Comparison of Study Results: Enhanced tabular results from different
studies and different configurations can now be compared through 2D plots.
Advanced 3D Spline Probing: generates a 2-plot along spline curve cuts
through the model for any computed quantity (fluxes, fields, currents,
temperature, etc). This feature allows users to probe results along arbitrarily
curved lines in their model gaining access to otherwise hard to view data.
New Results: more 3D plots type are computed, like Voltage and Flux.
New Results: more 3D and tabular results are computed for Core Loss,
Ohmic Loss, Hysteresis Loss, Excess Loss, etc.
3D Plots Animation: plots from different studies can be animated in the
same plot window or saved to video file. This animation feature is available in
the following cases:
o Any study type with motion results
o Transient Magnetic study type with results
o AC magnetic Study type with results
3D Plots Export: plots from different studies can be exported to a
Paraview( aopen source standalone 3D viewer for Windows/Unix/etc.)
2D Plots: Added text annotation to all reference point associated with a 2D
plot.
2D Plots: plots from different studies and different configuration can now be
superimposed in one window.
Report: Embedded HTML and Word Doc Viewer.

11

Analysis Background
Analysis Background
In EMS you can perform five types of analysis relevant to the electromagnetic and electromechanical engineering
design process. This chapter provides the basic theoretical information you should have before running any type of
analysis in EMS. It explains what each analysis does, the underlying assumptions, the required input, and the
expected output. It also gives a brief description of how to perform each type of analysis.
The following is a list of the analysis types you can perform in EMS:

Electrostatic
Electric Conduction
Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Transient Magnetic

13

EMS User Guide

About Maxwell's Equations


Maxwells equations are a set of partial differential equations that govern the behavior of electromagnetic devices.
They are linear in space and time. When electromagnetic fields interact with materials, the equations can become
nonlinear. The main quantities involved in Maxwells equations are:

The electric field intensity E


The electric flux density or electric displacement D
The magnetic field intensity H
The magnetic flux density or magnetic induction B
The surface current density J
The volume charge density .

In addition, we define:

The magnetic permeability


The electric permittivity
The electric conductivity

The four Maxwells equations are:

The above field equations are supplemented with the constitutive relations that describe the behavior of general
electromagnetic material or media:

14

Analysis Background

What is Low Frequency Electromagnetics?


There are two major sub-domains in electromagnetics: low-frequency and high-frequency domains. Both domains
are governed by Maxwell's equations.
The low-frequency domain includes the major part of the electromagnetic devices such as bushing, insulators,
circuit breakers, power generators, transformers, electric motors, capacitors, magnetic levitation devices,
synchronous machines, DC machines, permanent magnet motors, actuators, solenoids, etc.
Strictly speaking, any application in which displacement currents are negligible can be classified as low-frequency.
The absence of the displacement currents de-couples the electric and magnetic fields and the situation becomes
static.
The high-frequency domain includes the study of electromagnetic waves and propagation of energy through matter.
It may be some times difficult to distinguish between high-frequency and low frequency. Nevertheless, we can
generally say that electromagnetic fields in which the displacement currents cannot be neglected belong to the
high-frequency domain. The displacement currents couple the electric and magnetic fields to each other and the
situation becomes fully dynamic. Examples of devices that use high-frequency include antennas, waveguides,
transmission lines, filters, couplers, dielectric resonators, etc.

15

EMS User Guide

Electrostatic Analysis
What is Electrostatic Analysis?
Electrostatic analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain or regime. In this domain,
displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields depend on position only. They do not depend on time.
The size of the object is much smaller than the wavelength.
With these conditions, the first two of Maxwells equations become:

Along with the constitutive relation:

By introducing an electric scalar potential, , and expressing the electric field as:

the famous Poissons equation:

is obtained. The electrostatic analysis solves the Poisson equation.

Applications
Most applications require the computations of electric field and related quantities such as capacitance. Applications
include:

Bushing
Insulators
Capacitors
Strip-lines
Circuit breakers.

Electrostatic Assumption

16

Analysis Background

Electrostatic analysis assumes that no current flows in any material. Objects are either perfect conductors or
perfect insulators. For conducting objects, the electric charges are condensed on their surfaces, which forces the
field inside the conductors to be zero. Insulators are considered as perfect insulators with no current flowing inside
them.
It is important to bear in mind the above electrostatic assumptions. Therefore, thick conductors can either be left as
mesh voids or fully meshed. In the case where a thick conductor is kept as a mesh void, the boundary conditions
are applied on the surface of the conductor to simulate their presence. However, if the thick conductors are actually
meshed, the boundary conditions are applied on the component itself.
Conductors can have a zero thickness. In such cases, conductors are specified by a perfect conducting surface.
The only material property required is the relative permittivity. The electric conductivity is not required because it is
considered either infinite in conducting objects or zero in insulators.

Linearity Assumption
The relationship between electric and displacement fields is linear requiring all materials in the model to have a
linear relative permittivity.

Lossless Assumption
All materials are lossless which implies real permittivity in all material regions. As a result, all potential, electric, and
displacement fields are real.

17

EMS User Guide

Material Properties
For Electrostatic analysis, each component or body must be assigned a relative permittivity. This quantity is
just a real number larger than or equal to 1.0 for isotropic materials. It can also be a tensor that varies with
direction for orthotropic materials.
How about electric conductivity? You do not need to specify the electric conductivity of any part for this module.
Electrostatic analysis assumes zero electric field inside conductors and zero current flow in non-conductors, i.e.
insulators.
Certain materials maintain electric flux due to its microscopic dipoles permanent orientation. Such materials are to
be permanently polarized or have a Permanent polarization. For such class of materials the constitutive
relation between E and D are slightly different:

: where P is the permanent dipole moment. It is a vector quantity.


Since a permanently polarized material maintains an electric flux, it is considered like an excitation in EMS.

18

Analysis Background

Assigning a Voltage to a Conductor


In Electrostatic analysis you may assign either a fixed voltage or a floating conductor boundary condition to a
conductor as follows:

Fixed Voltage
Floating Conductor

The floating conductor restraint has an unspecified voltage value. It is treated differently depending whether the
capacitance matrix is computed or not. That is, if the capacitance matrix is requested, the simulator assigns 1.0 or
0 V on the floating conductors and computes the matrix using the stored electric energy. On the other hand, if the
capacitance matrix is not requested, the floating conductor is treated as an equi-potential entity with unknown
voltage value, and thus solved for. Consequently, to treat the voltage on a floating conductor as unknown, the
capacitance matrix shall not be requested.

19

EMS User Guide

Forces and Torques


The Electrostatic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into account to
properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

20

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of a fixed-voltage conductor.
To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the
EMS Manager tree.
The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.
The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table
after a successful run.
Only the Virtual Work method is permissible for this type of analysis.
The floating conductor restraint shall not be used on a conductor if the forces and torques are desired to
be computed.
The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid
body force does.

Analysis Background

Required Input for Electrostatic Analysis


To perform an Electrostatic analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires remeshing.
Material properties: You must specify a relative permittivity (er) for each component or body. The relative
permittivity is defined as:

where
er is the permittivity of the material or some times called the dielectric constant.
-12
eois the permittivity of free space; eo = 8.854x10 F/m.
er is a constant real number.

Loads/Restraints. At least one of the following type of loading/restraints:


Fixed voltage
Floating conductor
Charge density
Total Charge

o
o
o
o

Note: When you create a study, click Properties in the Study dialog box to set the desired options. To modify the
properties of an existing study, right-click its icon in the EMS Manager tree and choose Properties.

21

EMS User Guide

Performing Electrostatic Analysis


To perform Electrostatic analysis:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

Create an electrostatic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS
Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study.
Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit
Material. If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the components icon
and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of the
material.
Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one. If thermal solution option is on define the
desired thermal boundary conditions.
To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set.
Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to
request the default plots .
NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it.
You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing
PropertyManager.

6.

View the results:

22

View potential.
View electric field.
View electric displacement.
View force distribution.
View thermal results if thermal solution is available
o View temperature
o View temperature gradient
o View heat flux
To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.
To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Analysis Background

Output of Electrostatic Analysis


The Electrostatic analysis solves for the potential or the voltage inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the
following additional quantities are computed:

Electric field distribution

Electric displacement distribution

Nodal force distribution

Rigid body force

Capacitance matrix
The potential, the electric field, the electric displacement, and the nodal force distributions are displayed on the
model at nodes. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available:
Electric Field :
Ex: Electric Field in the X direction
Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction
Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction
Er: Resultant Electric Field
Electric Displacement:
Dx: Electric Displacement in the X direction
Dy: Electric Displacement in the Y direction
Dz: Electric Displacement in the Z direction
Dr: Resultant Electric Displacement
Force Density:
Fx: Force Density in the X direction
Fy: Force Density in the Y direction
Fz: Force Density in the Z direction
Fr: Resultant Force Density
Electric potential or voltage

The lumped quantities such as capacitance matrix, forces and torques are output to the Report folder where a
report could be generated and a results table could be viewed.

23

EMS User Guide

Electric Conduction Analysis


What is Electric Conduction Analysis?
Electric Conduction or the so called current flow analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain or
regime; i.e. displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields depend on position only. They do not
depend on time. Furthermore, the size of the object is much smaller than the wavelength. Unlike the Electrostatic
analysis which deals with insulators and electric conductors, the Electric Conduction deals with only conducting
media which can sustain a current flow. Therefore, all components must have a nonzero electric conductivity.
The conduction equation is obtained from the continuity relation:

Along with the constitutive relation

We obtain

By introducing an electric scalar potential, , and expressing the electric field as:

the famous conduction equation:

is obtained. The Electric Conduction analysis solves the conduction equation.

In the above equations, J is the electric current density, is the electric conductivity, E is the electric field, and is
the electric scalar potential.

Applications
Most applications require the computations of the electric current density that defines the current flow and related
quantities such as resistance. Applications include:

24

Analysis Background

Electric cables
Resistors
Shunts
Fuses
Electric welding.

Electric Conduction Assumption


The Electric Conduction analysis assumes that there is a current flow in all materials in the model. All materials
involved in the conduction analysis must have non-zero electric conductivity. Consequently, unlike most other
electromagnetic analyses, air is not meshed in conduction problems just because air has a zero electric
conductivity.
The only material property required is the electric conductivity. The permittivity is not required because
insulators are not allowed in this type of analysis.

Linearity Assumption
The relationship between electric field and the current density is linear requiring all materials in the model to have a
linear electric conductivity.

25

EMS User Guide

Material Properties
For Electric Conduction analysis, each component or body must be assigned an electric conductivity. This
quantity is just a real number for isotropic materials. It can also be a tensor that varies with direction for
orthotropic materials.
How about the permittivity? You do not need to specify the permittivity of any part for this analysis type. The
Electric Conduction analysis assumes a current flow in all components and no insulators are permitted.

26

Analysis Background

Applicable Restraints
In the Electric Conduction analysis you may assign either a fixed voltage or a contact resistance restraints as
follows:

Fixed Voltage
Contact Resistance

The fixed voltage is the most commonly used for this type of analysis. Whereas the contact resistance is rarely
used.

Remember that the units of the contact resistance is Ohms per square.

27

EMS User Guide

Resistance Calculation
The Electric Conduction module computes the resistance. The resistance is defined as:

The resistance is calculated as follows:

Calculating Resistance

All resistance sets must be defined before running the study.

28

Analysis Background

Required Input for Electric Conduction Analysis


To perform an Electric Conduction analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires remeshing.
Material properties: You must specify a non-zero electric conductivity for each component or body.

Loads/Restraints. You must specify at least one Fixed voltage

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one of the fixed voltages must be non-zero.

29

EMS User Guide

Performing Electric Conduction Analysis


To perform Electric Conduction analysis:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

Create a static study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree
and select Study . Define the Properties of the study.
Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit
Material. If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the components icon
and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of the
material.
Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one. If thermal solution option is on define the
desired thermal boundary conditions.
To compute resistance, right-click the Resistance Settings folder and define a resistance set.
Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to
request the default plots .
NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it.
You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing
PropertyManager.

6.

View the results:

30

View potential.
View electric field.
View electric current density.
View thermal results if thermal solution is available
o View temperature
o View temperature gradient
o View heat flux
To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.
To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Analysis Background

Output of Electric Conduction Analysis


The Electric Conduction analysis solves for the potential or the voltage inside the model. Once a solution is
obtained, the following additional quantities are computed:

Electric field distribution

Electric current density

Resistance
The potential, the electric field, and the electric current density are displayed on the model at nodes. For each one
of these quantities, the following components are available:
Electric Field :
Ex: Electric Field in the X direction
Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction
Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction
Er: Resultant Electric Field
Electric Current Density:
Jx: Electric Current Density in the X direction
Jy: Electric Current Density in the Y direction
Jz: Electric Current Density in the Z direction
Jr: Resultant Electric Current Density
Electric potential or voltage

Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available
at each motion time step

Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as resistance and dissipated power are output to the Report folder where a report
could be generated and a results table could be viewed.

31

EMS User Guide

Magnetostatic Analysis
What is Magnetostatic Analysis?
Magnetostatic or the so called DC Magnetic Field analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain
or regime; i.e. displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields depend on position only. They do not
depend on time. Furthermore, the size of the object is much smaller than the wavelength.
The Magnetostatic Analysis, linear and non-linear, calculates the magnetic fields produced by one the following:

A Permanent magnet.
A steady DC electric current.

Maxwells equations relevant to magnetostatic analysis fields are:

where H is the magnetic field, Js is the source current density, and B is the magnetic flux density. The constitutive
relation connects B and H:

where m is the magnetic permeability, in general a function of H. Hc is the coercive force or coercivity. Thus the
Magnetostatic Analysis solves the above two Maxwells equations
Applications

This type of analysis does not consider time-dependent effects such as eddy currents. It has many applications,
including:

DC machines
Permanent magnets
Motors
Generators
Actuators
Magnetic recording
Magnetic levitation devices
Magnetic levitation devices

Lossless Assumption
All materials are lossless which implies real magnetic permeability in all material regions. As a result,
all magnetic field and magnetic flux density are real.

32

Analysis Background

33

EMS User Guide

Material Properties
For Magnetostatic analysis, the following issues should be taken into consideration:

Linear isotropic
Linear orthotropic
Nonlinear isotropic
Permanent magnets
Electric conductivity

Linear Isotropic
For linear isotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body
which is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0.

Linear Orthotropic
For linear orthotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three
principal axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global
coordinate system.

Nonlinear Isotropic
Most of ferromagnetic materials exhibit a nonlinearity behavior where the permeability is function of the magnetic
field H. Practically, material manufactures provide a B-H or a magnetization curve that gives the magnetic flux B as
a function of H. From such curve, the permeability is extracted. The user could input the B-H curve in MKS units
(B in T and H in A/m) or Gaussian units (B in Gauss and H in Oersted).

Permanent Magnets
Permanent magnets or the so called hard magnetic materials have a special treatment for this type of
analysis. That is, depending on whether the material is linear or nonlinear, the following quantities must be
specified:

Material is nonlinear: Just specify a B-H curve that start in the second quadrant where the first point
must be (-coercivity, 0) and the maximum magnetic flux density represents the remanence.
Material is linear: specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the
remanence and the coercivity.

Electric Conductivity
In addition to the above mentioned magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned to all
coils.

Nonlinear orthotropic materials are not supported.

34

Analysis Background

Applicable Boundary Conditions


The only applicable restraint or boundary condition for the Magnetostatic analysis is the Normal Flux type. All
outer faces have the default Tangential Flux type.

35

EMS User Guide

Forces and Torques


The Magnetostatic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into account to
properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

36

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of all ferromagnetic and conducting
components.
To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the
EMS Manager tree.
The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.
The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table
after a successful run.
The Virtual Work method is the preferred method for ferromagnetic materials whereas the Lorentz Force
method is the preferred method for coils.
The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid
body force does.

Analysis Background

Required Input for Magnetostatic Analysis


To perform a Magnetostatic analysis, you need the following:

o
o

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires remeshing.
Material properties: Depending on the material, the following must be specified:
o Linear isotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body which
is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0.
o Linear orthotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three principal
axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global
coordinate system.
o Nonlinear isotropic: A B-H curve must be specified.
o A permanent magnet: Specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the
remanence and the coercivity. Specify also the direction of coercivity.
o A coil: In addition to the magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned to all coils.
Loads/Restraints. At least one Normal Flux boundary restraints must be specified.
Coils: Specify the coil properties.

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one coil or a permanent magnet must be defined for a Magnetostatic study.

37

EMS User Guide

Performing Magnetostatic Analysis


To perform a Magnetostatic analysis:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Create a magnetostatic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS
Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study..
Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit
Material. Additional steps may be needed:
If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the components icon
and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of
the material.
If you have assigned a permanent magnet to a component, right-click the components icon
and select Direction of Coercivity to define the preferred direction of the permanent magnet
and the local coordinate system if applicable.
Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one Normal Flux. If thermal solution option is
on define the desired thermal boundary conditions.
To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set.
Define all applicable coils.
Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to
request the default plots .
NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it.
You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing
PropertyManager.

6.

View the results:

38

View magnetic field.


View magnetic flux density.
View applied current density.
View force distribution.
View thermal results if thermal solution is available
o View temperature
o View temperature gradient
o View heat flux
To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.
To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Analysis Background

Output of Magnetostatic Analysis


The Magnetostatic analysis solves for the magnetic field inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the
following additional quantities are computed:

Magnetic field distribution

Magnetic flux density distribution


Applied current density

Nodal force distribution


Electric Field

Rigid body force

Inductance matrix
The magnetic field, the magnetic flux density, the nodal force, the electric field and the current density distributions
are displayed on the model at nodes. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available:
Magnetic Field :
Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction
Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction
Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction
Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field
Magnetic Flux Density:
Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction
By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction
Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction
Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density
Applied Current Density:
Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction
Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction
Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction
Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density
Force Density:
Fx: Force Density in the X direction
Fy: Force Density in the Y direction
Fz: Force Density in the Z direction
Fr: Resultant Force Density
Electric Field :
Ex: Electric Field in the X direction
Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction
Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction
Er: Resultant Electric Field
Flux:
Compute a single flux value at a given selected entities.

Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available
at each motion time step

Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as inductance matrix, magnetic energy, flux linkage, forces and torques are output to
the Report folder where a report could be generated and a results table could be viewed.

39

EMS User Guide

AC Magnetic Analysis
What is AC Magnetic Analysis?
The AC Magnetic or the so called time harmonic magnetic analysis belongs to the low-frequency
electromagnetic domain or regime; i.e. displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields have a time
j t
harmonic, i.e. e , time dependence.
The AC Magnetic Analysis calculates the effects of alternating currents (AC) in electromagnetic devices. These
effects include:

Eddy currents
Skin effects
Power loss due to eddy currents
Maxwells equations relevant to AC Magnetic analysis fields are:

where E is the electric field, and B is the magnetic flux density. The constitutive relation connects J and E:

where is the electric conductivity. Thus the AC Magnetic Analysis solves the above two Maxwells equations

Applications

Applications include:
Transformers
Electric motors
Induction machines
Eddy-current braking systems
Induction heating
Circuit breakers

Linearity Assumption
The relationship between magnetic flux density and magnetic field is linear requiring all materials in the model to
have a linear magnetic permeability. Thus, no B-H curves are allowed for AC Magnetic analysis.

Permanent Magnets
Permanent magnets are not allowed for AC Magnetic analysis.

40

Analysis Background

41

EMS User Guide

Skin Depth Calculation


A very important quantity that shall be computed for any AC Magnetic study is Skin Depth, which gives an indication
about the penetration of the field in the conducting regions. It is given by

Where m is the magnetic permeability in H/m, s is the electric conductivity in S/m, and f is the frequency in Hz.
For example, for an Aluminum plate where m = m0, s = 3.526x107 S/m at a frequency = 50 Hz, d = 11.98 mm
The Skin in Depth is a measure of how deep the field penetrates the conductor. Therefore, the higher is the
frequency the shallower is the penetration.

Why is the calculation of the Skin Depth important?


It is important for two main reasons:

Reason 1:
It gives us an indicator of whether the problem at hand must be treated with the AC Magnetic analysis or it is
sufficient to use the Magnetostatic analysis.
The rule of thumb for this type of decision is:

If the ratio of the thickness of the conductor to the Skin Depth in that conductor is less than one, then the
problem is resistance limited and can be treated as a magnetostatic problem.
if the ratio is larger or equal to one, then the problem must be treated with AC Magnetic analysis.
o If d/ < 1, then Magnetostatic is sufficient.
o If d/ >=1, Must use AC Magnetic analysis

Nevertheless, we can still use the AC Magnetic even if d/ < 1; the opposite is not true.

Reason 2:
It gives an indication of how to mesh inside a conductor. For the first skin depth penetration from the surface of the
conductor, the mesh must have at least two elements per skin depth. Beyond the first skin depth penetration, the
mesh could be made coarser but that may require splitting the conducting region to more components for mesh
control purposes. This process of splitting the first skin depth volume to a separate part out of the overall conductor
may be worthwhile if the conducting region is several skin depth deep and which may lead to a huge mesh if it
were meshed uniformly with a mesh size of at least two elements/skin depth.

42

Analysis Background

Material Properties
For AC Magnetic analysis, the following issues should be taken into consideration:

Linear isotropic
Linear orthotropic
Nonlinear materials
Permanent magnets
Electric conductivity

Linear Isotropic
For linear isotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body.

Linear Orthotropic
For linear orthotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three
principal axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global
coordinate system.

Nonlinear Materials
Nonlinear materials are not allowed for the AC Magnetic analysis.

Permanent Magnets
Permanent Magnets are not allowed for the AC Magnetic analysis.

Electric Conductivity
In addition to the above mentioned magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned for each
conducting component or body. If a component has a non zero conductivity, it supports eddy currents. However,
wound coils in spite of their electric conductivity, they do not support eddy currents because the wire turns are too
thin and isolated with some form of insulators. On the other hand, solid coils do support eddy currents and
exhibit skin effects.

Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas solid coils do.

43

EMS User Guide

Applicable Boundary Conditions


The only applicable restraint or boundary condition for the AC Magnetic analysis is the Normal Flux type. All
outer faces have the default Tangential Flux type.

44

Analysis Background

Forces and Torques


The AC Magnetic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into account to
properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of all ferromagnetic and conducting
components.
To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the
EMS Manager tree.
The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.
The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table
after a successful run.
The Virtual Work method is the preferred method for ferromagnetic materials whereas the Lorentz Force
method is the preferred method for coils.
The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid
body force does.

45

EMS User Guide

Required Input for AC Magnetic Analysis


To perform an AC Magnetic analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires remeshing.
Material properties: A relative magnetic permeability and an electric conductivity must be specified for
each component or body.
Loads/Restraints. At least one Normal Flux boundary restraints must be specified.
Coils: Specify the coil properties. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas
solid coils do.

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one coil must be defined for an AC Magnetic study.

46

Analysis Background

Performing AC Magnetic Analysis


To perform an AC Magnetic analysis:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Create an AC Magnetic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS
Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study..
Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit
Material. Additional steps may be needed:
If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the components icon
and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of
the material.
Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one Normal Flux. If thermal solution option is
on define the desired thermal boundary conditions.
To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set.
Define all applicable coils. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas solid
coils do.
Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to
request the default plots .
NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it.
You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing
PropertyManager.

6.

At each t phase , the following results are available: :

View magnetic field.


View magnetic flux density.
View applied current density.
View eddy current density.
View force distribution.
View thermal results if thermal solution is available
o View temperature
o View temperature gradient
o View heat flux
To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.
To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

47

EMS User Guide

Output of AC Magnetic Analysis


The AC Magnetic analysis solves for the magnetic field inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the
following additional quantities are computed:

Magnetic field distribution

Magnetic flux density distribution


Applied current density
Eddy current density

Nodal force distribution


Electric Field
Flux

Rigid body force

Inductance matrix
The magnetic field, the magnetic flux density,the electric field, the nodal force, and the current density distributions
j t
are displayed on the model at nodes. All quantities have a e time dependence. Except for the nodal force, all
other quantities are complex. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available:
Magnetic Field :
Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction
Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction
Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction
Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field
Magnetic Flux Density:
Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction
By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction
Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction
Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density
Applied Current Density:
Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction
Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction
Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction
Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density
Current Density:
Jex: Current Density in the X direction
Jey: Current Density in the Y direction
Jez: Current Density in the Z direction
Jer: Resultant Current Density
Force Density:
Fx: Force Density in the X direction
Fy: Force Density in the Y direction
Fz: Force Density in the Z direction
Fr: Resultant Force Density
Electric Field (E) :
Ex: Electric Field in the X direction
Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction
Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction
Er: Resultant Electric Field
Losses Density : is available only if analysis property Split Core Loss option is checked
Ohmic Loss
Eddy Loss
Hysteresis Loss
Excess Loss
Core Loss
Flux:
48

Analysis Background

Compute a single flux value at a given selected entities.


Voltage:
Compute a single voltage value at a given selected two point entities.

Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available
at each motion time step

Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as inductance matrix, magnetic energy, flux linkage, power loss in conducting regions,
forces and torques are output to the Report folder where a report could be generated and a results table could be
viewed.

49

EMS User Guide

Transient Magnetic Analysis


What is Transient Magnetic Analysis?
The Transient Magnetostatic analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain or regime; i.e.
displacement currents are neglected. It calculates magnetic fields that vary over time. These fields are typically
caused by surges in currents or voltages. This type of analysis can be linear or non-linear. It also addresses eddy
currents, power losses and magnetic forces.

The pertinent Maxwells equations for this type of analysis:

where E is the electric field, and B is the magnetic flux density.


The constitutive relation that connects B and H:

where m is the magnetic permeability, in general a function of H. Hc is the coercive force or coercivity
The constitutive relation that connects J and E:

where is the electric conductivity.

Applications
Typical applications of this analysis include:

50

Rotating machines
Linear actuators
Linear motors
Magnetic recording
Speakers
Nondestructive testing

Analysis Background

The Transient Magnetic analysis is truly the most general among all the available analyses. Below are some
features of the analysis:

The time dependence of the excitation is arbitrary. It must be described via a curve called the Current-Time
curve.
The materials may be linear or nonlinear.
Permanent magnets are supported.
The skin effects and eddy currents are included.

51

EMS User Guide

Material Properties
For Transient Magnetic analysis, the following issues should be taken into consideration:

Linear isotropic
Linear orthotropic
Nonlinear isotropic
Permanent magnets
Electric conductivity

Linear Isotropic
For linear isotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body
which is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0.

Linear Orthotropic
For linear orthotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three
principal axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global
coordinate system.

Nonlinear Isotropic
Most of ferromagnetic materials exhibit a nonlinearity behavior where the permeability is function of the magnetic
field H. Practically, material manufactures provide a B-H or a magnetization curve that gives the magnetic flux B as
a function of H. From such curve, the permeability is extracted. The user could input the B-H curve in MKS units
(B in T and H in A/m) or Gaussian units (B in Gauss and H in Oersted).

Permanent Magnets
Permanent magnets or the so called hard magnetic materials have a special treatment for this type of
analysis. That is, depending on whether the material is linear or nonlinear, the following quantities must be
specified:

Material is nonlinear: Just specify a B-H curve that start in the second quadrant where the first point
must be (-coercivity, 0) and the maximum magnetic flux density represents the remanence.
Material is linear: specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the
remanence and the coercivity.

Electric Conductivity
In addition to the above mentioned magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned for each
conducting component or body. If a component has a non zero conductivity, it supports eddy currents. However,
wound coils in spite of their electric conductivity, they do not support eddy currents because the wire turns are too
thin and isolated with some form of insulators. On the other hand, solid coils do support eddy currents and
exhibit skin effects.

Nonlinear orthotropic materials are not supported.

52

Analysis Background

53

EMS User Guide

Applicable Boundary Conditions


The only applicable restraint or boundary condition for the Transient Magnetic analysis is the Normal Flux
type. All outer faces have the default Tangential Flux type.

54

Analysis Background

Forces and Torques


The Transient Magnetic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into
account to properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of all ferromagnetic and conducting
components.
To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the
EMS Manager tree.
The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.
The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table
after a successful run.
The Virtual Work method is the preferred method for ferromagnetic materials whereas the Lorentz Force
method is the preferred method for coils.
The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid
body force does.
The forces and torques are time dependent. Before viewing the results, choose the desired time.

55

EMS User Guide

Required Input for Transient Magnetic Analysis


To perform a Transient Magnetic analysis, you need the following:

o
o

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires remeshing.
Material properties: Depending on the material, the following must be specified:
o Linear isotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body which
is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0.
o Linear orthotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three principal
axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global
coordinate system.
o Nonlinear isotropic: A B-H curve must be specified.
o A permanent magnet: Specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the
remanence and the coercivity. Specify also the direction of coercivity.
o A coil: In addition to the magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned to all coils.
Loads/Restraints. At least one Normal Flux boundary restraints must be specified.
Coils: Specify the coil properties. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas
solid coils do.

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one coil or a permanent magnet must be defined for a Transient Magnetic
study.

56

Analysis Background

Performing Transient Magnetic Analysis


To perform a Transient Magnetic analysis:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Create a Transient Magnetic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS
Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study..
Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit
Material. Additional steps may be needed:
If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the components icon
and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of
the material.
If you have assigned a permanent magnet to a component, right-click the components icon
and select Direction of Coercivity to define the preferred direction of the permanent magnet
and the local coordinate system if applicable.
Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one Normal Flux.
To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set.
Define all applicable coils. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas solid
coils do.
Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to
request the default plots .
NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it.
You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing
PropertyManager.

6.

At each time step, the following results are available:

View magnetic field.


View magnetic flux density.
View applied current density.
View eddy current density
View force distribution.
To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.
To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

57

EMS User Guide

Output of Transient Magnetic Analysis


The Transient Magnetic analysis solves for the magnetic field inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the
following additional quantities are computed at each time step:

Magnetic field distribution

Magnetic flux density distribution


Applied current density
Eddy current density

Nodal force distribution

Rigid body force

Inductance matrix
The magnetic field, the magnetic flux density, the nodal force, and the current density distributions are displayed on
the model at nodes. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available at each time step::
Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: the time step is the motion time step

Magnetic Field :
Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction
Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction
Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction
Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field
Magnetic Flux Density:
Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction
By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction
Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction
Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density
Applied Current Density:
Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction
Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction
Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction
Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density
Current Density:
Jex: Current Density in the X direction
Jey: Current Density in the Y direction
Jez: Current Density in the Z direction
Jer: Resultant Current Density
Force Density:
Fx: Force Density in the X direction
Fy: Force Density in the Y direction
Fz: Force Density in the Z direction
Fr: Resultant Force Density
Flux:
Compute a single flux value at a given selected entities.

Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as inductance, magnetic energy, flux linkage, power loss in conducting regions, forces
and torques are output to the Report folder where a report could be generated and a results table could be

58

Analysis Background

viewed. However, the inductance and flux linkage are viewable only if the total number of coils is equal one. In
future releases, the inductance matrix will be available for N coils.

59

EMS User Guide

Thermal Analysis
What is Thermal Analysis?
There are two mechanisms of heat transfer. These mechanisms are:

Conduction
Convection

Thermal analysis calculates the temperature distribution in a body due to one or both of these mechanisms. In
both cases, heat energy flows from the medium with higher temperature to the medium with lower temperature.
Heat transfer by conduction and convection requires the presence of an intervening medium while heat transfer by
a third mechanism, (radiation, which is not currently supported in EMS) does not.
In EMS all heat sources are due to electric current flowing in non-perfect conductors. In theses cases, Joule
heating is generated and acts as a heat source. Therefore, thermal analysis in EMS must always follow an
electromagnetic analysis so that the heat sources in the model are automatically pre-computed. By default,
thermal coupling is not enabled on any of the electromagnetic studies and the user must explicitly turn it on to
perform thermal analysis.

60

Analysis Background

Performing Thermal Analysis


To perform Thermal analysis:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Thermal analysis is not a standalone EMS analysis type but must be preceded by an electromagnetic
analysis. Thermal analysis is coupled to all EMS analysis types except for the Transient Magnetic
analysis, i.e., it is coupled to Electrostatics, Electric Conduction, Magnetostatics, and AC Magnetics.
To couple thermal analysis to your electromagnetic analysis of a given study:
Right-click the desired study's folder and select Properties. The study properties page is
displayed.
Check the Steady State Thermal checkbox.
Continue the usual steps of performing your electromagnetic analysis.
Make sure that all materials have their proper thermal conductivity values defined (you may need to
change the default values).
Make sure to add to the proper thermal boundary conditions under the Load/Restraint.
A thermal solution will be automatically computed after the electromagnetic analysis is completed and the
corresponding thermal results folders will be generated.

61

EMS User Guide

Output of Thermal Analysis


After running a study with the thermal solution option on, you can view the following thermal quantities(in case of
transient the results will be available at each transient time step:
Temperature
Temperature distribution
Temperature Gradient :
TGx: Temperature gradient in the X direction
TGy: Temperature gradient in the Y direction
TGz: Temperature gradient in the Z direction
TGr: Resultant Temperature gradient
Heat Flux :
FLx: Heat Flux in the X direction
FLy: Heat Flux in the Y direction
FLz: Heat Fluxin the Z direction
FLr: Heat Flux gradient

where:
X, Y, and Z refer to the global coordinate system. If you choose a reference geometry, these directions refer to the
selected reference entity.

Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available
at each motion time step

62

Analysis Background

Mechanisms of Heat Transfer

63

EMS User Guide

Conduction
Conduction
Conduction is the heat transfer mechanism in which thermal energy transfers from one point to another through the
interaction between the atoms or molecules of the matter. Conduction occurs in solids, liquids, and gasses.
Conduction does not involve any bulk motion of matter. Gases transfer heat by direct collisions between energetic
molecules, and their thermal conductivity is low compared to solids since they are dilute media. The conduction of
energy in liquids is the same as in gases except that the situation is considerably more complex since the molecules
are more closely spaced and molecular force fields exert a strong influence on the energy exchange in the collision
process. Nonmetallic solids transfer heat by lattice vibrations so there is no motion of the media as heat propagates
through. Metals are better conductors than nonmetals at normal temperatures because they have free electrons that
carry thermal energy.
The heat transfer by conduction obeys Fourier's law which states that the rate of heat conduction Qconduction is
proportional to the heat transfer area (A) and the temperature gradient (dT/dx), or:

Qconduction = - K A ( dT/dx)
o

where K, the thermal conductivity, measures the ability of a material to conduct heat. The units of K are W/m C or
o
o
(Btu/s)/in F. The conversion between different unit systems is as follows: 1 W/(mK) = 1 W/(m C) = 0.85984 kcal/(hr
o
o
m C) = 0.5779 Btu/(ft hr F)
For the planar layer shown below, the rate of heat conduction is given by,
Qconduction = - K A ( THot - TCold )/L

The following figure shows ranges for the thermal conductivity values for liquids, nonmetallic solids, and pure metals
at normal temperature and pressure.

64

Analysis Background

Thermal conductivity (K) for some materials

The following table lists thermal conductivities (in W/m.oK) for selected materials at room temperature (25 oC):

Material

K
(W/m.oK)

Copper

401

Aluminum

250

Silver

429

Gold

310

Steel

46

Stainless
Steel

16

Lead

35

Platinum

70

Zinc

116

Silicon

112

Click here for a more complete list of thermal conductivity values of different materials.

65

EMS User Guide

List of thermal conductivity values of different materials


The following table lists thermal conductivities (in W/m. oK) for selected materials at room temperature (25 oC):

1 W/(mK) = 1 W/(moC) = 0.85984 kcal/(hr moC) = 0.5779 Btu/(ft hr oF)

Material

K (W/m.oK)

Acetone

0.16

Acrylic

0.2

Air

0.024

Alcohol

0.17

Aluminum

66

250

Aluminum Oxide

30

Ammonia

0.022

Antimony

18.5

Argon

0.016

Asbestos-cement board

0.744

Asbestos-cement sheets

0.166

Asbestos-cement

2.07

Asbestos, loosely packed

0.15

Asbestos mill board

0.14

Asphalt

0.75

Balsa

0.048

Bitumen

0.17

Benzene

0.16

Beryllium

218

Analysis Background

Brass

109

Brick dense

1.31

Brick work

0.69

Cadmium

92

Carbon

1.7

Cement, portland

0.29

Cement, mortar

1.73

Chalk

0.09

Cobalt

0.9

Concrete, light

0.42

Concrete, stone

1.7

Constantan

22

Copper

401

Corian (ceramic filled)

1.06

Corkboard

0.043

Cork, regranulated

0.044

Cork, ground

0.043

Cotton

0.03

Carbon Steel

54

Cotton Wool insulation

0.029

Diatomaceous earth (Sil-o-cel)

0.06

Earth, dry

1.5

Ether

0.14

Epoxy

0.35

67

EMS User Guide

Felt insulation

0.04

Fiberglass

0.04

Fiber insulating board


Fiber hardboard

0.2

Fireclay brick 500oC

1.4

Foam Glass

0.042

Gasoline

0.15

Glass

1.05

Glass, Pearls, dry

0.18

Glass, Pearls, saturated

0.76

Class, window
Glass, wool Insulation
Glycerol

68

0.048

0.96
0.04
0.28

Gold

310

Granite

1.7 - 4.0

Gypsum or plaster board

0.17

Hairfelt

0.05

Hardboard high density

0.15

Hardwoods (oak, maple..)

0.16

Helium

0.142

Hydrogen

0.168

Ice (0oC, 32oF)

2.18

Insulation materials

0.035 - 0.16

Iridium

147

Analysis Background

Iron

80

Iron, wrought

59

Iron, cast

55

Kapok insulation

0.034

Kerosene

0.15

Lead Pb

35

Leather, dry

0.14

Limestone

1.26 - 1.33

Magnesia insulation (85%)

0.07

Magnesium

156

Marble

2.6

Mercury

Methane

0.030

Methanol

0.21

Mica

0.71

Mineral wool blanket

0.04

Molybdenum

138

Monel

26

Nickel

91

Nitrogen

0.024

Nylon 6

0.25

Oil, machine

0.15

Olive oil

0.17

Oxygen

0.024

69

EMS User Guide

Paper

0.05

Paraffin Wax

0.25

Perlite, atmospheric pressure

0.031

Perlite, vacuum

0.00137

Plaster, gypsum

0.48

Plaster, metal lath

0.47

Plaster, wood lath

0.28

Plastics, foamed

0.03

Platinum
Plywood

70

70
0.13

Polyethylene HD

0.42 - 0.51

Polypropylene

0.1 - 0.22

Polystyrene expanded

0.03

Porcelain

1.5

PTFE

0.25

PVC

0.19

Pyrex glass

1.005

Quarts mineral

Rock Wool insulation

0.045

Sand, dry

0.35

Sand, saturated

2.7

Sandstone

1.7

Sawdust

0.08

Silica aerogel

0.02

Analysis Background

Silicon

112

Silicone oil

0.1

Silver

429

Snow (temp < 0oC)

0.05 - 0.25

Sodium

84

Softwoods (fir, pine ..)

0.12

Steel

46

Stainless Steel

16

Straw insulation

0.09

Styrofoam

0.033

Tin Sn

67

Zinc Zn

116

Urethane foam

0.021

Vermiculite

0.058

Vinyl ester

0.25

Water

0.58

Water, vapor (steam)

0.016

Wood across the grain, white


pine

0.12

Wood across the grain, balsa

0.055

Wood across the grain, yellow


pine

0.147

Wood, oak
Wool, felt

0.17
0.07

71

EMS User Guide

Convection
Convection
Convection is the heat transfer mode in which heat transfers between a solid face and an adjacent moving fluid (or
gas). Convection has two elements:
Energy transfer due to random molecular motion (diffusion), and
Energy transfer by bulk or macroscopic motion of the fluid (advection).
The mechanism of convection can be explained as follows: as the layer of the fluid adjacent to the hot surface
becomes warmer, its density decreases (at constant pressure, density is inversely proportional to the temperature)
and becomes buoyant. A cooler (heavier) fluid near the surface replaces the warmer fluid and a pattern of
circulation forms.
The rate of heat exchange between a fluid of temperature Tf and a face of a solid of area A at temperature Ts
obeys the Newton's law of cooling which can be written as:
Qconvection = h A (Ts - Tf)
2

where h is the convection heat transfer coefficient. The units of h are W/m K or Btu/s in F. The convection heat
transfer coefficient (h) depends on fluid motion, geometry, and thermodynamic and physical properties.
Generally, there are two modes convection heat transfer:
Natural (Free) Convection
The motion of the fluid adjacent to a solid face is caused by buoyancy forces induced by changes in the density of
the fluid due to differences in temperature between the solid and the fluid. When a hot plate is left to cool down in
the air the particles of air adjacent to the face of the plate get warmer, their density decreases, and hence they
move upward.

Forced Convection
An external means such as a fan or a pump is used to accelerate the flow of the fluid over the face of the solid. The
rapid motion of the fluid particles over the face of the solid maximizes the temperature gradient and increases the
rate of heat exchange. In the following image, air is forced over a hot plate.

72

Analysis Background

Convection Heat Coefficient


Newton's law of cooling states that the heat transfer rate leaving a surface at temperature Ts into a surrounding
fluid at temperature Tf is given by the equation:
Qconvection = h A (Ts - Tf)
2

where the heat transfer coefficient h has the units of W/m K or Btu/s in F. The coefficient h is not a thermodynamic
property. It is a simplified correlation to the fluid state and the flow conditions and hence it is often called a flow
property.
Convection is tied to the concept of a boundary layer which is a thin layer of transition between a surface that is
assumed adjacent to stationary molecules and the flow of fluid in the surroundings. This is illustrated in the next
figure for a flow over a flat plate.
Where u(x,y) is the x-direction velocity. The region up to the outer edge of the fluid layer, defined as 99% of the
free stream velocity, is called the fluid boundary layer thickness d(x).
A similar sketch could be made of the temperature transition from the temperature of the surface to the
temperature of the surroundings. A schematic of the temperature variation is shown in the next figure. Notice that
the thermal boundary layer thickness is not necessarily the same as that of the fluid. Fluid properties that make up
the Prandtl Number govern the relative magnitude of the two types of boundary layers. A Prandtl Number (Pr) of 1
would imply the same behavior for both boundary layers.
The actual mechanism of heat transfer through the boundary layer is taken to be conduction, in the y-direction,
through the stationary fluid next to the wall being equal to the convection rate from the boundary layer to the fluid.
This can be written as:
h A (Ts - Tf) = - k A (dT/dy)s
Thus the convection coefficient for a given situation can be evaluated by measuring the heat transfer rate and the
temperature difference or by measuring the temperature gradient adjacent to the surface and the temperature
difference.
Measuring a temperature gradient across a boundary layer requires high precision and is generally accomplished
in a research laboratory. Many handbooks contain tabulated values of the convection heat transfer coefficients for
different configurations.
The following table shows some typical values for the convective heat transfer coefficient:

73

EMS User Guide

Motion Analysis
What Is Motion Analysis?
EMS couples to SolidWorks Motion which is available as in add-in from SolidWorks Premium. Using SolidWorks,
you can accurately simulate and analyze the motion of an assembly while incorporating the effects of Motion
Study elements (including forces, springs, dampers, and friction). A Motion Analysis study combines motion
study elements with mates in motion calculations. Consequently motion constraints, material properties, mass, and
component contact are included in the SolidWorks Motion kinematic solver calculations.
For a complete documentation about SolidWorks Motion, please refer to SolidWorks Help and SolidWorks
Tutorials. As explained therein, in the motion manager, there are three types of motion study that can be defined:

Animation (available in core SolidWorks). You can use Animation to animate the motion
of assemblies:
Add motors to drive the motion of one or more parts of an assembly.
Prescribe the positions of assembly components at various times using set key points.
Animation uses interpolation to define the motion of assembly components between key
points.

Basic Motion (available in core SolidWorks). You can use Basic Motion for approximating the
effects of motors, springs, contact, and gravity on assemblies. Basic Motion takes mass into
account in calculating motion. Basic Motion computation is relatively fast, so you can use this for
creating presentation-worthy animations using physics-based simulations.
Motion Analysis (available in SolidWorks Premium). You can use Motion Analysis for accurately
simulating and analyzing the effects of motion elements (including forces, springs, dampers, and
friction ) on an assembly. Motion Analysis uses computationally strong kinematic solvers, and
accounts for material properties as well as mass and inertia in the computations. You can also use
Motion Analysis to plot simulation results for further analysis.

You may use any of the three types in SolidWorks Motion. However, you must use Motion Analysis if you want to
couple the motion to EMS.

74

Analysis Background

Performing Motion Analysis


You may couple to SolidWorks Motion Magnetostatic, Electrostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses
but not the Electric Conduction. The process of coupling an EMS study to SolidWorks Motion is straightforward
and requires only a check mark when creating an EMS study. However, before creating an EMS study, a Band
component that encloses the moving parts must be created in SolidWorks.

What's a Band?
A Band is a region that encapsules completely the moving components, e.g. the rotor, the shaft, and the
permanent magnets in a permanent magnet brushless DC motor, and can not intersect any fixed
component. Since EMS supports both rotational and translational motions. A rotary motion is cyclic, thus the
Band is typically a cylinder that fills the air gap and encloses all rotating components. An example of a band for a
brushless DC motor is shown below:

Cross section of a brushless permanent magnet DC motor. The yellow part is the Band. It encloses the moving
parts from all sides. It also includes the air gap and touches the stator.
In case of a translational motion, the Band must occupy the entire range of the motion, i.e. from minimum to
maximum. Thus, it tends to occupy a much larger volume compared to rotational motion. An example of band for
a linear reluctance motor is shown below:

75

EMS User Guide

It is the user's responsibility to make sure that the moving object remains inside the band. If the moving part, e.g.
the plunger is the above example, goes beyond the band, the results will be wrong.
Starting a New Motion Study
You can create the first motion study for an assembly by clicking the Motion Study tab to the right of the Model tab
toward the lower portion of the graphics area.

To start a new motion study for an assembly, open the assembly and do one of the following:

Right-click the Motion Study tab and click Create New Motion Study.

Click New Motion Study

(Assembly toolbar).

The new motion study appears with the MotionManager tree defined by components of the FeatureManager
design tree.

76

Analysis Background

Selecting a Motion Type


The available motion studies types are:

Animation
Basic Motion
Motion Analysis

You can select the type of motion study from the Type of Study list at the top of the MotionManager, located
below the FeatureManager design tree. However, to couple your motion study to EMS Motion, you can only
choose Motion Analysis.
What to do at the EMS level?
Not much? you would define your EMS study the usual way with one exception. You must check the Motion
Analysis check mark.

How about mass and moment of inertia?


You simply specify the material of the moving parts at the SolidWorks level, i.e. not at the EMS level. SolidWorks
automatically computes the mass and moment of inertia properties and feed them into SolidWorks motion. The
mass and inertia are important only for Force-based and not for the Motor-based motion.

77

EMS User Guide

Motor-based versus Force-based motion studies


It important to distinguish between Motor and Force-based motion studies. SolidWorks Motion help includes a
complete explanation of both type of studies. A brief discussion about these 2 type of motions is given below:
Motor-based motion
A Motor-based motion can be considered a "driven motion" as if it were applied by a motor without consideration of
mass or inertia. In this case, we do not care about what causing and/or driving the motion. A typical example for
this type of motion is a constant speed DC rotational motor with known speed. It is true that there magnetic
forces and torques due to permanent magnets and/or windings. However, in Motor based situation, these forces
are not directly related to the motion. At each time step, thus at each position, EMS solves the electromagnetic
problem and computes the requested lumped quantities such as force, torque, inductance, impedance, back emf,
etc.
Force-based motion
A Forcer-based motion can be considered a "driving motion" where mass or inertia are taken into
consideration . In this case, we do care about what causing and/or driving the motion. A typical example for this
type of motion is a generator. The applied external load, i.e. force or torque, is combined with the internal
magnetic forces and torques due to permanent magnets and/or windings to drive the motion. Hence, the kinematic
78

Analysis Background

quantities such as the position, speed, and acceleration are not known a priori. At each time step, thus at each
position, EMS interacts with SolidWorks Motion to obtain the external load, combines it with the magnetic force and
torque, and then feeds back to SolidWorks Motion to solve the kinematics problem. Since, EMS computes the
forces and torques to combine them with the external mechanical loads to drive the motion, it is important to
specify in EMS the force set on the moving rigid body ensemble before solving, e.g.
Consequently, for Force-based motion EMS yields not only the usual electromagnetic quantities such as force,
torque, impedance, back emf, but also the kinematics results such as speed and acceleration.

79

EMS User Guide

Output of Motion Analysis


After running a study with the Motion Analysis option on, you can view the following:

80

The same electromagnetic results as non-motion study at each motion time step, hence
position. In addition, the back emf due to the effect of the motion on the coils is readily available.
Kinematics results, i.e. position, speed, and acceleration.

EMS Fundamentals
EMS Fundamentals
What is EMS?
EMS is a 3D-field simulator for electromagnetic and electromechanical applications. These applications include:
bushing, insulators, circuit breakers, power generators, transformers, electric motors, capacitors, magnetic levitation
devices, synchronous machines, DC machines, permanent magnet motors, actuators, solenoids, etc. EMS is an
Add-in to SolidWorks .
EMS is based on the powerful finite element method (FEM), which solves the physical equations directly without
any simplifications or assumptions. It is designed to help you gain physical insight into the performance of your
designs through the computation of important parameters such as: torques, forces, fields, currents, inductances,
capacitances, flux linkages, current losses, electrical stresses, etc.
EMS shortens time to market by saving time and effort in searching for the optimum design.

This chapter discusses some basic concepts and terminology used throughout the EMS software. It provides an
overview of the following topics:

Benefits of Analysis
Basic Concepts of Analysis
EMS Manager Tree
Design Studies
Analysis Steps
Material Properties
Restraints and Loads
Coils or Electromagnets
Meshing
Running Analysis
Viewing Results
Global and Local Coordinate Systems
Results Databases
Working With Assemblies
Using Units
Languages

81

EMS User Guide

Benefits of Analysis
After building your design in SolidWorks, you need to make sure that it performs efficiently. In the absence of
analysis tools, this task can only be answered by performing expensive and time-consuming product development
cycles and prototypes. A product development cycle typically includes the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Building your model using the SolidWorks software.


Building a prototype of the design.
Testing the prototype in the field.
Evaluating the results of the field tests.
Modifying the design based on the field test results.

This process continues until a satisfactory solution is reached. Analysis can help you accomplish the following
tasks:

82

Reduce cost by simulating the testing of your model on the computer instead of expensive field tests.
Reduce time to market by reducing the number of product development cycles.
Improve products by quickly testing many concepts and scenarios before making a final decision, giving
you more time to think of new designs.

EMS Fundamentals

Basic Concepts of Analysis


EMS uses the Finite Element Method (FEM). FEM is a numerical technique for analyzing engineering designs.
FEM is accepted as the standard analysis method due to its generality and suitability for computer implementation.
FEM divides the model into many small pieces of simple shapes called elements effectively replacing a complex
problem by many simple problems that need to be solved simultaneously.

CAD model of an assembly

Model subdivided into small pieces


(elements)

Elements share common points called nodes and common sides called edges. The process of dividing the model
into small pieces is called meshing.
The response at any point in an element is interpolated from the response at the element nodes and edges. Each
node/edge is fully described by a number of parameters depending on the analysis type and the element used. For
example, the voltage of a node fully describes its response in electrostatic analysis. For magnetic analyses, both
nodes and edges are used where the scalar quantities are placed on nodes and vectors quantities are placed on
edges. The unknown coefficients associated with the nodes and/or edges are called degrees of freedom (DOFs).
Analysis using FEM is called Finite Element Analysis (FEA).

EMS formulates the equations governing the behavior of each element taking into consideration its connectivity to
other elements. These equations relate the response to known material properties, restraints, and excitations.
Next, the program organizes the equations into a large set of simultaneous algebraic equations and solves for the
unknowns or the DOFs.
In electrostatic analysis, for example, the solver finds the voltage at each node and then the program calculates
electric and displacement fields. For electrostatic
EMS offers the following type of studies:

Electrostatic (or Electric Field) studies. Electrostatic studies calculate electric field, electric displacement,
voltage, capacitance matrix, force, torque, and electric energy.
Electrostatic analysis can help you identify points of high electric fields or the so called hot points that may
generate sparks or lead to dielectric breakdowns. You may use it to determine forces and torques for
electric motors and MEMS.

Electric Conduction (or Current Flow) studies. Electric Conduction studies calculate electric
field, voltage, current density, resistance, and dissipated power.

83

EMS User Guide

Electric Conduction analysis can help you determine current flow in wires and other conducting media. It
can be instrumental in identifying points of high current density that may lead to a metal melting or fuse
failure.

Magnetostatic studies. Magnetostatic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux density, inductance
matrix, force, torque, and magnetic energy.
Magnetostatic analysis is probably the most commonly used by EMS users. Most electromechanical
devices and instruments use permanent magnets and/or electric coils as their source of energy at DC
frequency. This analysis can be instrumental in determining the performance of your electromechanical
device. It may also be useful in computing the inductance matrix of your electronic device.

AC Magnetic (or Time Harmonic) studies. AC Magnetic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux
density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power dissipated.
AC Magnetic analysis can help you determine eddy currents and skin effects which play an important role
for both electronic and electromechanical devices and circuits. For example, for a circuit board you may
determine the eddy current on a neighboring line which would indicate to you the level of cross talk. For a
motor, you may determine the skin effects for your ferromagnetic components. You may also determine the
induced voltage in a receiving coil due the currents in transmitting coils.

Transient Magnetic Studies. Just like the AC Magnetic, Transient Magnetic studies calculate magnetic
field, magnetic flux density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power dissipated but for
an arbitrary time dependence such as a pulse.
Again, Transient Magnetic analysis is similar to AC Magnetic analysis, except it has an arbitrary time
dependence. Therefore, all features and capabilities of AC Magnetic are also available for Transient
Magnetic at each time step. This type of analysis can be instrumental to determine the response of the
system after the source is turned off.

84

EMS Fundamentals

EMS Manager Tree


The EMS Manager tree organizes analysis studies. Its functionality is similar to the FeatureManager tree. You can
use the menu system or the EMS Manager tree to manage analysis studies. Because of its intuitive representation
and context-sensitive right-mouse menus, the EMS Manager is preferred over the menu system.
EMS creates a folder in the EMS Manager tree for each study. Subfolders define the parameters of the study. For
example, each electrical or magnetic study has a Load/Restraint subfolder. Each restraint and load condition is
represented by an icon in this subfolder.
Right-mouse menus provide context-sensitive options. Drag and drop (or copy and paste) help you to define
subsequent studies quickly.
Restraints and loads use PropertyManager instead of dialog boxes, allowing your graphics to be displayed instead
of hidden by dialog boxes.
The EMS Manager tree provides a convenient view of most important information of analysis studies in a
document
The EMS Manager tree provides the following folders and tools:

Each study is represented by a folder and subfolders in the tree. The subfolders depend on the study
type. EMS assigns a unique icon to each study type for easy identification of the study type.
Study type

Study
icon

Electrostatic
Electric Conduction
Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Transient Magnetic

After a successful run of a study, EMS creates result folders


the type of the study.

in the tree. The subfolders depend on

85

EMS User Guide

Design Studies
A device is usually subjected to different operational conditions and design criteria to achieve the desired
specifications. It is, therefore, important to consider all possible scenarios of loads and boundary conditions and try
different material properties in the analysis of a device.
A design study is defined by the following factors:

model dimensions
study type and related options to define analysis intent
material properties
loads, loads, and boundary conditions

To create a study, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and click Study. Click Add to define a study by
name, analysis type, and properties. The properties of the study set options related to a particular analysis type.
EMS meshes only with first order tetrahedral or the so called Tetra 4 mesh elements. Internally, first and second
order scalar and vectors shape functions are derived.

Using Design Studies


You can use design studies to check existing products or design new ones.

86

Checking an existing design. When checking an existing product, the geometry is already determined.
The goal is to check the performance of the product under different working conditions and investigate the
possibility of improving the performance.
Making a new design. When using design analysis to make a new design, you can try different
geometric configurations and materials to test the response of the model in various working conditions.

EMS Fundamentals

Analysis Steps
The steps needed to perform an analysis depend on the study type. You complete a study by performing the
following steps:

Create a study defining its analysis type and options.


Define material properties for each body.
Specify restraints and loads. Specify restraints such as Flux is Normal for magnetic studies. For
electric studies, specify voltages or charges.
Mesh the model where EMS divides the model into many small pieces called elements.
Run the study.
View results.

NOTE: You can define material properties, loads, restraints, and create the mesh in any order. However, you must
define all the necessary steps before running the study.

87

EMS User Guide

Material Properties
Before running a study, you must define all the necessary material properties required by the corresponding
analysis type. For example, the permeability is required for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic
studies, while the permittivity is needed for Electrostatic studies. You can define material properties at any time
before running the analysis. All material properties are defined through the Material dialog box.
When you create a study, the program creates a Solids folder. The Solids folder will contain an icon for each body
in the component. Each body in the component must be assigned a material before running the analysis.
This section discusses the following topics:

Material Properties Used by EMS


Material Models
About Permanent Magnets
The B-H Curve of a material
Assigning a Material from a Material Library
Adding or Inserting a Material Library
Adding a Material to an Existing Library
Assigning a B-H Curve to a material
Assigning a Permanent Magnet

Materials in EMS are not related to materials defined in SolidWorks or CosmosWorks.

88

EMS Fundamentals

Restraints and Loads


Restraints, loads, or boundary conditions define the environment of the model. For Electrical analyses fixed
voltages are commonly applied. For Magnetic studies Normal fluxes are often needed to enforce a symmetry
condition or a far field truncation. Each restraint or load condition is represented by an icon in the EMS Manager
tree. EMS provides study-sensitive options for defining restraints. For example, if a Magnetic study is considered,
only Normal and/or Tangential fluxes are available for selection.
Loads and restraints are fully associative and automatically adjust to changes in geometry. The drag and drop (or
copy and paste) functionality in the EMS Manager tree lets you copy studies, folders, and items.

89

EMS User Guide

Specifying Directions
Specifying directions is often necessary during model definition and result viewing. In model definition, directions
are used to define orthotropic material properties and permanent magnets. In result viewing, directions are
required for viewing directional results, like electric fields, magnetic flux densities, applied current densities, and
eddy current densities in certain directions.
In essence, one can think of different ways to specify directions such as references planes, planar faces,
coordinate systems, and straight edges. Nevertheless, in this present release only the coordinate system is
available to specify the directions for orthotropic material and permanent magnets. The result viewing is displayed
in the global coordinate system.

Coordinate Systems
A coordinate system defines 3 directions, X, Y, and Z. The default coordinate system used by EMS, called the
global coordinate system, is based on Plane1. The origin of the global coordinate system is located at the origin of
the part or assembly. Plane1 is the top reference plane that appears in the FeatureManager design tree and can
have a different name. The reference triad shows the global X-, Y-, and Z-directions. All other coordinate systems
are referred to as local coordinate systems.

90

EMS Fundamentals

Coils or Electromagnets
A coil literally means a multiple-turn winding of a conductor such as copper wire wound around a bobbin. When
the conducting windings carry current, a magnetic field is produced. Much stronger magnetic fields can be
produced if a core of ferromagnetic material such as iron or steel is placed inside the coil. The field produced by the
coil causes the iron to magnetize and generate a field of its own. This field can be hundreds or thousands of times
stronger than that of the coil itself. A coil is also called electromagnet.
The main advantage of a electromagnet over a permanent magnet is that the magnetic field can be rapidly
manipulated over a wide range by controlling the electric current. The poles of an electromagnet can even be
reversed by reversing the flow of electricity.
The main disadvantage of an electromagnet compared to a permanent is the possible accumulation of residual
magnetization in the ferromagnetic core. Whenever, a coil with a ferromagnetic core is turned on and off again, the
core may retain some residual magnetization due to hysteresis. This magnetic field can persist indefinitely. As
more electricity is passed through the electromagnet, more domains align, causing the magnetic field strength to
increase.
In applications where a variable magnetic field is not required, permanent magnets are generally superior. Since a
electromagnet requires a constant flow of electricity, it consumes electrical power. Additionally, permanent magnets
can be manufactured to produce stronger fields than any electromagnet of similar size.
Both electromagnets and permanent magnets are of prime importance in EMS. They are the driving force for any
magnetic device. In the finite element sense, they represent the excitations. However, they are treated differently
in EMS.
When you create a Magnetic study, the program creates a Coils folder in the EMS Manager tree. EMS adds an
item in the Coils folder for each coil you define on one or more entities. However, permanent magnets are
specified with the materials.

91

EMS User Guide

Air Modeling
Unlike structural analysis, electromagnetic analysis requires the modeling of the air regions between the different
components and the air surrounding the device. Why? Because electromagnetic fields generated by the device
span and extend over such air regions. How far do they extend? It depends on the frequency, the materials of the
device, and the strength of the source.

Air truncation
The air region surrounding the device is in essence infinite. Shall the finite element model include an infinite
region? No. The infinite region must be truncated in order to limit the number of unknowns to a manageable size
that can fit in the computer memory. What is the shape such region? It does not matter as long as it is far enough
from the device. But what is far enough?

How far is the air region?


There is no exact rule! But if you take an imaginary box that covers your device and you place your air region away
from you device by about 1/2 to 1 of the longest side of your box shall be far enough. How do I check if it is indeed
so? Run your study and examine the fields on the outer boundary of the air. If the fields have decayed to very
small value compared to the maximum, then the outer boundary is far enough. Otherwise, push the outer
boundary even further out. But won't that lead to a very large problem? Not if you follow the guidelines below.

Air meshing
You have to distinguish between the outer air that is surrounding the device and the inside air between the various
parts of the device such air gaps. The inside air shall be meshed moderately fine to capture the fields
variations. However, the outer air need not to be fine because the fields decay away from the device.

An exception
Air has to be modeled and meshed for all the analyses, except for the Electric Conduction. Why? Because for
this type of analysis the electrically conducting media making up the device is modeled. Since air has an
almost zero conductivity, it needs not to be meshed. Nonetheless, if the air region has a nonzero electric
conductivity for any reason, then such region must also be modeled even in the case of the Electric Conduction
analysis.

92

EMS Fundamentals

Meshing
Finite Element Analysis (FEA) provides a reliable numerical technique for analyzing engineering designs. The
process starts with the creation of a geometric model. Then, the program subdivides the model into small pieces of
simple shapes called elements connected at common points called nodes. The process of subdividing the model
into small pieces is called meshing. Finite element analysis programs look at the model as a network of
interconnected elements.
The accuracy of the solution depends on the quality of the mesh. In general, the finer the mesh the better the
accuracy. The generated mesh depends on the following factors:

Created geometry
Mesh options.
Mesh control.
Global element size and mesh tolerance. EMS suggests a global element size and tolerance. The global
element size refers to the average length of an element edge. The number of elements increases rapidly
by using a smaller global element size.

93

EMS User Guide

Running Studies
After assigning materials, defining loads and restraints, and meshing the model, you can run the study to calculate
the results. If you run a study before meshing it, EMS meshes the model and runs the study.
To run a study, right-click its icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Run or click Run

in the EMS toolbar.

Solvers
Direct methods solve the equations using exact numerical techniques. Iterative methods solve the equations using
approximate techniques where in each iteration, a solution is assumed and the associated errors are evaluated.
The iterations continue until the errors become acceptable.
Depending on the analysis type, the following points must be taken into consideration.

For Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, and Magnetostatic studies EMS offers both direct and iterative matrix
solvers. The direct is the recommended and default solver. However, if the program complains about the
lack of memory, please switch to the iterative solver.
For AC and Transient Magnetic studies, there is no matrix solver option. But internally it is the iterative solver
that is implemented.

Refer to the Design Studies section for more information.

94

EMS Fundamentals

Viewing Results
After running the analysis, EMS generates standard plots for each type of analysis automatically. The standard
plots for an analysis type are the most commonly used results. For example, after running a Magnetostatic study,
EMS creates result folders containing default plots for magnetic flux density, magnetic field, and applied current
density if applicable. You can view a plot by double-clicking its icon in the EMS Manager tree.
You can also define other plots by right-clicking a result folder and selecting Define.
EMS result viewing tools include fringe plots, section plots, iso plots, probing, and vector plots. For sections plots,
you can choose various planes. A clipping utility is provided for convenient viewing of section and iso plots.
For more information, refer to the Viewing Results section.

Generating Reports
You can generate a structured Internet-ready report that includes all available plots automatically. The report
wizard guides you to customize the report and include result plots. To start the Report wizard, right-click the
Report folder and select Define.

Saving Result Plots


You can save result plots in various formats. You can include result plots automatically in the study report. To
save a plot in any of these formats, right-click the plot icon and select Save As.

95

EMS User Guide

Coordinate Systems
The Global Coordinate System
Directional input in EMS refers by default to the global coordinate system (X, Y, and Z), which is based on Plane1
with its origin located at the Origin of the part or assembly. Plane1 is the first plane that appears in the
FeatureManager tree and can have a different name. The reference triad shows the global X-, Y-, and Z-directions.
The figure below illustrates the relationship between the global coordinate system and Plane1, Plane2, and Plane3.

Where X is Direction 1 of Plane 1, Y is Direction 2 of Plane 1, and, Z is the Normal to Plane 1.

Local Coordinate Systems


Local coordinate systems are coordinate systems other than the global coordinate system. Use local coordinate
system to specify the magnetization direction of a permanent magnet and principal axes for orthotropic materials.

96

EMS Fundamentals

Result Databases
EMS saves the results of each study a database file with extension EMS The database name for a study is
constructed automatically by joining the study name to the part or assembly name separated by -. For example if
the document name is Magnet-assembly and the study name is Study1, then the file name for the study will be
Magnetassembly-Study1.EMS.
To transfer the results of a study from computer A to computer B, copy the EMS file of the study and the
SolidWorks document file. You should copy the EMS file to the proper folder as specified in the Results Options of
computer B. To change this folder, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree, select Options, and click the
Results tab.

97

EMS User Guide

Working with Assemblies


When working with assemblies, note the following:

98

Click Tools, Interference Detection to check interference. Make sure that the Treat coincidence as
interference option is unchecked. All parts should be free from interference with each other for proper
modeling.
Click Tools, Check to check for invalid faces and invalid edges. Checking for short edges can help in
diagnosing meshing problems.
You can exclude a component from analysis by suppressing it and then remeshing the model. If a mesh
exists and you do not remesh, the components will be considered in the analysis.
Hiding a component does not exclude it from analysis. In other words, the program meshes hidden
components. You can hide components and create exploded views for improved selection and viewing
during study definition.

EMS Fundamentals

About Units
EMS uses the MKS system of units. Nevertheless, it offers you the choice between MKS and CGS when it comes
to material properties of a permanent magnet and B-H curve. Most material data for permanent magnets and
ferromagnetic materials are specified in CGS units. As for output results, you have the option to view them in
various units.

The Meshing PropertyManager displays the suggested average element size and the tolerance in the default
unit of length in SolidWorks.
The MKS units of principal electromagnetic quantities are given in the table below.

99

EMS User Guide

Languages
EMS is available in the following languages:

100

English

EMS Interface
EMS Interface Components
This section discusses the following interface components of EMS:

EMS Manager Tree

Toolbars

101

EMS User Guide

EMS Manager Tree


EMS Manager Tree
The EMS Manager tree organizes analysis studies. Its functionality is similar to the FeatureManager tree. You can
use the menu system or the EMS Manager tree to manage analysis studies. Because of its intuitive representation
and context-sensitive right-mouse menus, the EMS Manager is preferred over the menu system.
EMS creates a folder in the EMS Manager tree for each study. Subfolders define the parameters of the study. For
example, each electrical or magnetic study has a Load/Restraint subfolder. Each restraint and load condition is
represented by an icon in this subfolder.
Right-mouse menus provide context-sensitive options. Drag and drop (or copy and paste) help you to define
subsequent studies quickly.
Restraints and loads use PropertyManager instead of dialog boxes, allowing your graphics to be displayed instead
of hidden by dialog boxes.
The EMS Manager tree provides a convenient view of most important information of analysis studies in a
document
The EMS Manager tree provides the following folders and tools:

Each study is represented by a folder and subfolders in the tree. The subfolders depend on the study
type. EMS assigns a unique icon to each study type for easy identification of the study type.
Study type

Study
icon

Electrostatic
Electric Conduction
Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Transient Magnetic

102

After a successful run of a study, EMS creates result folders


the type of the study.

in the tree. The subfolders depend on

EMS Interface

EMS Manager Tree Conventions


The EMS Manager tree uses the following conventions:

A plus sign symbol to the left of an items icon indicates that it contains associated sub-items, such as
load or restraint items, mesh controls. Click
to expand the item and display its contents.

EMS assigns the following icons to each study type for easy identification of the study type:
Study type

Study
icon

Electrostatic
Electric Conduction
Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Transient Magnetic

A red check mark on an item indicates that the item has been partially or fully defined. For example, when a
material is assigned to a part, the part's icon changes from

to

When meshing of an assembly is completed, the mesh icon changes from

EMS assigns this icon

When you right-click an item, a right-mouse menu opens. Use this menu to quickly access related
operations.

to

to user-defined mesh controls.

103

EMS User Guide

Define Study Name


The Define Study Name dialog box allows you to create a new study by drag and drop or by copy and paste. You
can also associate the study with any of the existing SolidWorks configurations.

Study Name. Type a name for the study.


SolidWorks configuration to use. Select the desired SolidWorks configuration from the list.

To create a study by drag and drop:


1.

In the EMS Manager tree, drag a study icon and drop it onto the part or assembly icon at the top of the
tree.
The Define Study Name dialog box opens.

2.
3.

Type a name for the new study in the Study Name box.
Select a SolidWorks configuration.

4.

Click OK

To create a study using copy and paste:


1.
2.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click a study icon the select Copy.
At the top of the tree, right-click the part or assembly icon and select Paste.
The Define Study Name dialog box opens.

3.
4.

Type a name for the new study in the Study Name box.
Select a SolidWorks configuration.

5.

Click OK

NOTES:

104

When using drag and drop (or copy and paste) to create a study, the new study will have the same
analysis and mesh types as the original study.
If the configuration you selected is not the active SolidWorks configuration, the new study is grayed out. A
feature that is not well-defined with the specified configuration appears with x (in red) on top of its icon in
the tree. To access a grayed-out study, activate the SolidWorks configuration associated with it.

EMS Interface

Drag and Drop Functionality


Once you have defined a study, you can use drag and drop to help you define subsequent studies quickly and
efficiently. Drag and drop are similar to copy and paste.

Drag and Drop Rules

You can drag and drop (or copy and paste) studies, materials, loads/restraints, mesh control, and results.
You can drag and drop folders (including all items inside), a single item, or a group of items.

To avoid invalid input, EMS will let you drop items and folders to valid destinations only. While dragging
an item, a group of items or folder, only the valid destinations in the EMS Manager tree will highlight. For
example you can drag and drop material folders and items from any study to any other study, but you
cannot drag and drop Load/restraint folders or items from an electrostatic study to a magnetostatic study
or vice versa.

NOTES:

You can only drag and drop result folders and items from one study to another study of the same type.
For example, when you drag a Magnetic Flux Density Plot icon from a magnetostatic study and move it
along the EMS Manager tree, only the Magnetic Flux Density folders of a magnetostatic studies will
highlight. This table summarizes these rules.

Item to Drag

Drop to

Solid Folder

Solid Folder

Items in the Solids Folder

Solids folder

Load/Restraint Folder

Study

Items in the Loads/Restraint


Folder

Loads/Restraint folder

Results Folder

Study

Items in the Results Folder

Corresponding folder

Mesh folder

Study folder

Mesh control items

Mesh icon

Notes
Valid for all studies (copies
materials)
Valid for all studies (copies
materials)
Valid for relevant studies only
(compatible analysis)
Valid for relevant studies only
(electric study to electric
study, or magnetic study to
magnetic study)
Valid for the same type of
study only
Same result type only (field
item to field folder, potential
item to potential folder, etc.)
Valid for all studies (copies
mesh)

105

EMS User Guide

Toolbars
EMS Toolbars
EMS toolbars provide you with shortcuts to frequently used operations. This section gives brief description of all
EMS toolbar. You can easily customize the toolbar by hiding it or moving it around as desired.

To move the toolbar, click anywhere on its boundary and drag it to the desired location.
To hide/show a toolbar, click View, Toolbars and choose the toolbar that you want to hide/show.
If you drag a toolbar away from the edges, it becomes a floating palette.
If you drag a toolbar close to a horizontal edge, it will extend horizontally. Similarly, if you drag it to a
vertical edge, it will extend vertically.
To display a tool tip, place the mouse pointer on it. To execute a tool, point to it and click the left mouse
button.

EMS has the following toolbar:


Button

Tool Tip

Defines, modifies, or deletes studies.

Mesh

Creates solid mesh for the active study.

Run
Show/Hide Mesh
Apply Mesh Control
Flux is Normal

Flux is Tangential

Electric Charge

Floating Conductor

Contact Resistance

Fixed Voltage

Temperature

Convection

106

Purpose

Study

Starts the solver for the active study.


Toggles the visibility of the mesh.
Defines a mesh control for selected
entities.
Imposes a normal flux boundary
condition on the selected faces for the
active magnetic study (magnetostatic,
AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).
Imposes a tangential flux boundary
condition on the selected faces for the
active magnetic study (magnetostatic,
AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).
Defines an electric charge density on the
selected entities for the active
electrostatic study only.
Defines a floating conductor on the
selected entities for the active
electrostatic study only.
Defines a contact resistance on the
selected face for the active electric
conduction study only.
Defines a fixed voltage on the selected
entities for the active electrical study
(electrostatic and electric conduction).
Defines a temperature on the selected
entities for the active study when thermal
solution option is on (electrostatic,
electric conduction, magnetostatic and
AC magnetic).
Defines a convection on the selected
entities for the active study when thermal
solution option is on (electrostatic,
electric conduction, magnetostatic and
AC magnetic).

EMS Interface

Heat Flux

Volume Heat

Solid Coil

Wound Coil

Function curve
Virtual work force

Lorentz force

Resistance

Report
Results Table

Defines a heat heat on the selected


entities for the active study when thermal
solution option is on (electrostatic,
electric conduction, magnetostatic and
AC magnetic).
Defines a volume heat on the selected
entities for the active study when thermal
solution option is on (electrostatic,
electric conduction, magnetostatic and
AC magnetic).
Defines a solid coil for the
active magnetic study (magnetostatic,
AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).
Defines a wound coil for the
active magnetic study (magnetostatic,
AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).
Defines a function curve.
Calculates the virtual work force & torque
on the selected entities for the active
study. Valid for all studies except for
electric conduction.
Calculates the Lorentz force & torque on
the selected entities for the active
study. Valid for the active magnetic
study (magnetostatic, AC magnetic, and
transient magnetic).
Calculates resistance on the selected
entities for the active electric conduction
study only .
Creates an html report for the active
study.
View the results table for the active
study.

107

Design Studies
Design Studies
The concept of design studies lies at the heart of the operation of EMS. In this section, you learn about the
following topics:

The Concept of Design Studies


Study Types
Mesh Types
Creating a Study
Electrostatic Study Properties
Electric Conduction Study Properties
Magnetostatic Study Properties
AC Magnetic Study Properties
Transient Magnetic Study Properties
EMS Matrix Solvers
Multiple Studies

109

EMS User Guide

Concept of Design Studies


A model is usually subjected to different design criteria and performance conditions. It is therefore important to
consider all possible scenarios of loads and boundary conditions and try different material properties in the
analysis of a model.
A design study is defined by the following factors:

model dimensions

study type and related options to define the analysis intent

material properties

loads and boundary conditions

mesh

Analysis Types
Defining an Analysis Study

110

Design Studies

Study Types
EMS offers the following types of studies:

Electrostatic
(or Electric Field) studies. Electrostatic studies calculate electric field, electric
displacement, voltage, capacitance matrix, force, torque, and electric energy.
Electrostatic analysis can help you identify points of high electric fields or the so called hot points that may
generate sparks or lead to dielectric breakdowns. You may use it to determine forces and torques for
electric motors and MEMS.

Electric Conduction
(or Current Flow) studies. Electric Conduction studies calculate electric
field, voltage, current density, resistance, and dissipated power.
Electric Conduction analysis can help you determine current flow in wires and other conducting media. It
can be instrumental in identifying points of high current density that may lead to a metal melting or fuse
failure.

Magnetostatic
studies. Magnetostatic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux density,
inductance matrix, force, torque, and magnetic energy.
Magnetostatic analysis is probably the most commonly used by EMS users. Most electromechanical
devices and instruments use permanent magnets and/or electric coils as their source of energy at DC
frequency. This analysis can be instrumental in determining the performance of your electromechanical
device. It may also be useful in computing the inductance matrix of your electronic device.

AC Magnetic
(or Time Harmonic) studies. AC Magnetic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux
density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power dissipated.
AC Magnetic analysis can help you determine eddy currents and skin effects which play an important role
for both electronic and electromechanical devices and circuits. For example, for a circuit board you may
determine the eddy current on a neighboring line which would indicate to you the level of cross talk. For a
motor, you may determine the skin effects for your ferromagnetic components. You may also determine the
induced voltage in a receiving coil due the currents in transmitting coils.

Transient Magnetic
Studies. Just like the AC Magnetic, Transient Magnetic studies calculate
magnetic field, magnetic flux density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power
dissipated but for an arbitrary time dependence such as a pulse.
Again, Transient Magnetic analysis is similar to AC Magnetic analysis, except it has an arbitrary time
dependence. Therefore, all features and capabilities of AC Magnetic are also available for Transient
Magnetic at each time step. This type of analysis can be instrumental to determine the response of the
system after the source is turned off.

111

EMS User Guide

Element Types
EMS uses Vector Finite Element which necessitate first-order tetrahedral 3D solid elements. Therefore, the
mesher generates only these elements.

112

Design Studies

Study
The Study PropertyManager allows you to create studies.
To create a study:
1.

Right-click the assembly or part icon at the top of the EMS Manager tree and select Study, or click EMS,
Study.
The Study PropertyManager appears.

2.
3.

Under Study name, type the name of the study.


Under Analysis type, select one of the following:

4.

Electrostatic
Electric Conduction
Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Transient Magnetic

Click OK
NOTE: You can click Apply to create the study without closing the PropertyManager .

To delete a study, right-click its icon and select Delete.


To view details about a study, right-click its icon and select Details.
Note: Properties of the study play an important role in defining it. To view or modify the properties of a
study, right-click its icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Properties.

You can create a study using drag and drop or copy and paste.

113

EMS User Guide

EMS Analysis Options

114

Design Studies

Electrostatic Analysis Options

Electrostatic Options
Use the Electrostatic dialog box to set the desired options for the active Electrostatic study.

Solver the following two solver options are available:

o
o

Direct. Check this option to use the Direct sparse solver. This is default and
recommended solver type.
Iterative Check this option to use the Iterative solver. Use if the memory available is
not sufficient for Direct solver.

Solver precision. Select the desired level of precision. Three level are available ( Normal Precision,
High Precision or Very High Precision).
Compute Capacitance. Check this box if you want to compute capacitance.
Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current
electrostatic analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click

and select a different directory.

What is Electrostatic Analysis....

115

EMS User Guide

Electric Conduction Analysis Options

Electric Conduction Options


Use the Electric Conduction dialog box to set the desired options for the active Electric conduction study.

Solver currently, the only option available for Electric Conduction studies is the matrix solver (Direct )
type .
For future release two solver options will be available:

o
o

Direct. Check this option to use the Direct sparse solver. This is default and
recommended solver type.
Iterative Check this option to use the Iterative solver. Use if the memory available is
not sufficient for Direct solver.

Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the
current Electric Conduction study.
Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current
Electric Conduction analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click

What is Electric Conduction Analysis....

116

and select a different directory.

Design Studies

Magnetostatic Analysis Options

Magnetostatic Options
Use the Magnetostatic dialog box to set the desired options for the active Magnetostatic study.

Solver Two choices are available:


o Direct. Check this option to use the Direct sparse solver. This is default and recommended
solver type.
o Iterative Check this option to use the Iterative solver. Use if the memory available is not
sufficient for Direct solver.
The number of increments for nonlinear problems. If the coil current or the permanent magnet load is
high, the nonlinear solution may not converge. In such case, the load must be subdivided into smaller
increments. For each increment, the Modified Newton-Raphson technique is used. If at any given
increment, the total number of iterations is reached without convergence, the program stops and asks you
to increase the number of increments.
Compute circuit parameters. Check this box if you want the inductance matrix and flux linkage to be
computed. It takes extra time to compute these quantities. Therefore, if the user does not need them,
they should not be computed.
Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the
current magnetostatic analysis.
Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current
magnetostatic analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click

and select a different directory.

What is Magnetostatic Analysis...

117

EMS User Guide

AC Magnetic Analysis Options

AC Magnetic Options
Use the AC Magnetic dialog box to set the desired options for the active AC Magnetic study.

Frequency. Enter the frequency in Hz.


Compute circuit parameters. Check this box if you want the inductance matrix, the flux linkage, and
the induced voltage to be computed. It takes extra time to compute these quantities. Therefore, if the
user does not need them, they should not be computed.
Split Core Loss. Check this box if you want to compute the Eddy, Hysteresis and Excess losses for the
current AC Magnetic study.
Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the
current AC Magnetic study.
Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current AC
Magnetic analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click

What is AC Magnetic Analysis...

118

and select a different directory.

Design Studies

Transient Magnetic Analysis Options

Transient Magnetic Options


Use the Transient Magnetic dialog box to set the desired options for the active Magnetostatic study.

Compute circuit parameters. Check this box if you want the inductance matrix and flux linkage to be
computed. It takes extra time to compute these quantities. Therefore, if the user does not need them,
they should not be computed.

Time Duration: You must specify the following time quantities;


o Start Time: Enter here the starting time in seconds. For example: 1e-05.
o End Time: Enter the ending time in seconds. For example: 1e-03.
o Time Increment: Enter the time step in seconds. The solver will start from the start time and
increment the time by the step entered here.
Maximum number of bisections: During the simulation, if the solver does not converge, the program will
automatically bisect each time step recursively until it converges or reaches the maximum number of
bisections.
Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the
current Transient analysis.
Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the
current analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click

and select a different directory.

What is Transient Magnetic Analysis...

119

EMS User Guide

EMS Matrix Solvers


In finite element analysis, a problem is represented by a set of algebraic equations that must be solved
simultaneously. There are two classes of matrix solution methods: direct and iterative.
Direct methods solve the equations using exact numerical techniques. Iterative methods solve the equations using
approximate techniques where in each iteration, a solution is assumed and the associated errors are evaluated.
The iterations continue until the errors become acceptable.
Depending on the analysis type, the following points must be taken into consideration.

120

For Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, and Magnetostatic studies EMS offers both direct and iterative matrix
solvers. The direct is the recommended and default solver. However, if the program complains about the
lack of memory, please switch to the iterative solver.
For AC and Transient Magnetic studies, there is no matrix solver option. But internally it is the iterative solver
that is implemented.

Design Studies

Multiple Studies
You can create multiple studies as desired. Each study is presented in the EMS Manager tree. When you run a
study, the program uses the active mesh if it is current, otherwise it meshes the model before running the study.

121

EMS User Guide

Activating a SolidWorks Configuration


To activate a SolidWorks configuration associated with a study:
In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the study icon and select Activate SW configuration.
The study and the associated configuration become active.

122

Design Studies

Modifying the Properties of a Study


To modify the properties of a study:
1.

In the EMS Manager, right-click the study's icon and select Properties.
The corresponding study dialog box appears.

2.
3.

Make your changes and click OK.


Click any of the following links to learn more about the properties available for each study (analysis) type.

4.

Electrostatic Options
Electric Conduction Options
Magnetostatic Options
AC Magnetic Options
Transient Magnetic Options

You can also change the location of the results folder by clicking

on under Results Folder box.

123

EMS User Guide

Deleting a Study
To delete a study using the EMS Manager tree:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the study icon and select Delete.
A message window appears.

2.

124

Click OK .

Design Studies

Running a Study
Verifying the Input
It is important to verify your input before running a study:

Verify that you have assigned the proper material for each component.
Verify that you have specified the proper study properties.
Verify that you have specified the proper loads and restraints.
Verify the mesh and make sure it corresponds to the desired mesh options.

Running a Study
When you run a study, EMS calculates the results based on the specified input for materials, restraints, loads, and
mesh.
You can choose to run a study automatically after meshing it by checking the Run analysis after meshing option
in the Mesh PropertyManager.

125

Material Information
Material Properties
Before running a study, you must define all the necessary material properties required by the corresponding
analysis type. For example, the permeability is required for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic
studies, while the permittivity is needed for Electrostatic studies. You can define material properties at any time
before running the analysis. All material properties are defined through the Material dialog box.
When you create a study, the program creates a Solids folder. The Solids folder will contain an icon for each body
in the component. Each body in the component must be assigned a material before running the analysis.
This section discusses the following topics:

Material Properties Used by EMS


Material Models
About Permanent Magnets
The B-H Curve of a material
Assigning a Material from a Material Library
Adding or Inserting a Material Library
Adding a Material to an Existing Library
Assigning a B-H Curve to a material
Assigning a Permanent Magnet

Materials in EMS are not related to materials defined in SolidWorks or CosmosWorks.

127

EMS User Guide

Material Properties Used in EMS

Permittivity. Permittivity, or dielectric constant, can be looked at as the quality of a material that allows it
to store electrical charge. A given amount of material with high permittivity can store more charge than a
material with lower permittivity. A high permittivity tends to reduce any electric field present. Therefore the
capacitance of a capacitor can be increased by increasing the permittivity of the dielectric material inside
it. In electromagnetism one can define an electric displacement field D, which represents how an applied
electric field E will influence the organization of electrical charges in the medium, including charge
migration and electric dipole reorientation. Its relation to permittivity is given by D = E, where is the
permittivity which is a scalar if the medium is isotropic or a 3 by 3 matrix otherwise. In MKS units,
permittivity is measured in farads per meter (F/m).
Free Space Permittivity (o). Is the permittivity of vacuum or the scale factor that relates the values of
D and E in a vacuum.

o= 8.854187817610-12 F/m.

Relative Permittivity. It is the ratio of the permittivity of the medium to the free space permittivity r =
/o. It is dimensionless.
Since the permittivity it is a very small number, the relative permittivity is the most commonly used. The
relative permittivity is used in the Electrostatic analysis.

Permeability. Permeability is the degree of magnetisation of a material that responds linearly to an


applied magnetic field. Although permeability is related in physical terms most closely to permittivity, it is
probably easier to think of permeability as representing "conductivity for magnetic flux"; just as those
materials with high electrical conductivity let electric current through easily so materials with high
permeabilities allow magnetic flux through more easily than others. Materials with high permeabilities
include iron and the other ferromagnetic materials. The permeability is usually denoted by and it relates
the magnetic flux density B to the magnetic field intensity H; BHIn MKS units, permeability is
measured in henrys per meter (H/m). It is a scalar if the medium is isotropic or a 3 by 3 matrix
otherwise. Unlike permittivity , permeability is often a highly non-linear quantity, especially for steel and
iron.
Free Space Permeability(o). Is the permeability of vacuum or the scale factor that relates the values of

B and H in a vacuum. o= 410 H/m.


Relative Permeability. It is the ratio of the permeability of the medium to the free space permeability
/o. It is dimensionless.
-7

r =

Since the permeability it is a very small number, the relative permeability is the most commonly used. The
relative permeability is used in the Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Electric Conductivity. Electric conductivity, or simply conductivity, is a measure of how well a material
accommodates the transport of electric charge. Its MKS derived unit is the siemens per meter (named
after Werner von Siemens). Electrical conduction is an electrical phenomenon where a material (solid or
otherwise) contains movable particles with electric charge, which can carry electricity. When a difference
of electrical potential is placed across a conductor, its movable charges flow, and an electric current
appears. Conductivity is defined as the ratio of the current density to the electric field strength. It is the
reciprocal of electrical resistivity. It is usually represented by the letter .
Scientists often divide
materials into three classes based upon their respective conductivities:
o A conductor such as a metal has high conductivity.
o An insulator like glass or a vacuum has low conductivity.
o The conductivity of a semiconductor is generally intermediate, but varies widely under different
conditions, such as exposure of the material to electric fields or certain frequencies of light.
Electrical conductivity is used in Electric Conduction, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

128

Coercivity. Coercivity or the coercive force is a property of a permanent magnet. Commonly denoted by
the letter Hc, it is the intensity of the magnetic field needed to reduce the magnetization of a
ferromagnetic material to zero after it has reached saturation. On a Hysteresis loop, it is the point where
the loop intersects the H axis .The coercivity is measured in Amperes per meter (A/m) in MKS units and in
Oersted in Gaussian units.

Material Information

Coercivity is used in Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Residual Induction. Residual induction or remanence is also a property of a permanent magnet.


Commonly denoted by the letter Br, it is the amount of magnetic flux density remaining in a ferromagnetic
material after an external magnetic field is removed after saturation in a closed circuit. On a Hysteresis
loop, it is the point where the loop intersects the B axis. The Br represents the maximum magnetic flux
density output of this material without an external magnetic field. The Residual induction is measured in
Tesla in MKS units and in Gauss in Gaussian units.
Residual Induction is used in Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Permanent Polarization. Certain materials maintain an electric flux due to its microscopic dipoles
permanent orientation even in the absence of an external electric field. A body such as this with a
permanent polarization P is called an electret, by analogy with "magnet." In MKS units, it is measured in
2
Coulombs/m .
Thermal Conductivity. The Thermal Conductivity indicates the effectiveness of a material in transferring
heat energy by conduction. It is defined as the rate of heat transfer through a unit thickness of the material
per unit temperature difference. The units of thermal conductivity is W/m*K ( Watt / meter * Kelvin )

129

EMS User Guide

Material Models
Linear Materials
The induced response is directly proportional to the applied loads. For example, if you double the applied voltage,
the potential and electric field would double. Similarly, if you double the coil current, the magnetic flux density and
magnetic field would double.
In EMS, the conductivity and permittivity are always linear. Consequently, the Electrostatic and Electric
Conduction analyses are always linear.

Nonlinear Materials
The induced response depends on the past history of the material. For example, most ferromagnetic materials
have a hysteresis loop or B-H curve where the response depends whether the device is operated above the knee
of the curve.
In EMS, only the permeability may be nonlinear. Furthermore, such nonlinearity is permitted only for the
Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The AC Magnetic analysis does not support nonlinear
permeability.

Isotropic Materials
A material is isotropic if its electrical and magnetic properties are the same in all directions. Isotropic materials can
have a homogeneous or non-homogeneous microscopic structures.

Orthotropic Materials
A material is orthotropic if its electrical or magnetic properties are unique and independent in three mutually
perpendicular directions.
The table below gives a summary for the different analyses:

ANALYSIS TYPE

LINEAR
ISOTROPIC

LINEAR
ORTHOTROPIC

NONLINEAR
ISOTROPIC

NONLINEAR
ORTHOTROPIC

Electrostatic

YES

YES

NO

NO

Electric
Conduction

YES

YES

NO

NO

Magnetostatic

YES

YES

YES

NO

AC Magnetic

YES

YES

NO

NO

Transient
Magnetic

YES

YES

YES

NO

Defining Orthotropic Properties For Solids


The orthotropic material directions throughout a component are defined based on the local coordinate system
selected. If a part is manufactured such that this is not true, then you should model it as different parts in order to
define orthotropic directions properly. For example, consider the part shown in the figure:
130

Material Information

You need to model this component as two components; the cylinder and the planar part. You can then define a
coordinate system for the planar part where the main orthotropic axes are along (x,yz). As for the cylindrical part,
define a second coordinate system where the main orthotropic axes are along ( z).

131

EMS User Guide

About Permanent Magnets


A permanent magnet is a material that when inserted into a strong magnetic field will begin to exhibit a magnetic
field of its own. Furthermore, it also continue to exhibit a magnetic field once removed from the original field due to
its atomic micro-structure. That's what makes permanent magnets interesting! Indeed, the exhibited field would
allow the magnet to exert force, i.e. ability to attract or repel, on other magnetic materials. Such exhibited field
would then be continuous without weakening provided the material is not subjected to a change in environment
such as temperature, demagnetizing field, etc.. The ability to continue exhibiting a field while withstanding different
environments helps to define the capabilities and types of applications in which a magnet can be successfully used.
Permanent magnets are usually called hard magnetic materials. This type of material is characterized by a B-H
Curve that starts in the second quadrant if it exhibits a nonlinearity behavior. They are other magnets but they are
not permanent magnets which are called soft magnetic materials whose B-H Curve is limited to the first quadrant.
They are similar to permanent magnets in that they exhibit a magnetic field of their own in the presence of an
external magnetic field. However, they do not continue to exhibit a magnetic field once the applied field is reduced
to zero. These materials are useful for carrying, concentrating and shaping magnetic fields. They are used
throughout the magnetic industry and are often as vital in the design of a magnetic assembly as the permanent
magnet.
In EMS, two important permanent magnets quantities that must be specified:

Coercivity. Coercivity or the coercive force. Commonly denoted by the letter Hc, it is the intensity of the
magnetic field needed to reduce the magnetization of a ferromagnetic material to zero after it has reached
saturation. On a Hysteresis loop, it is the point where the loop intersects the H axis .The coercivity is
measured in Amperes per meter (A/m) in MKS units and in Oersted in Gaussian units.

Residual Induction. Residual induction or remanence. Commonly denoted by the letter Br, it is the
amount of magnetic flux density remaining in a ferromagnetic material after an external magnetic field is
removed after saturation in a closed circuit. On a Hysteresis loop, it is the point where the loop intersects
the B axis. The Br represents the maximum magnetic flux density output of this material without an
external magnetic field. The Residual induction is measured in Tesla for MKS units and in Gauss for
Gaussian units.

There are four main types of permanent magnets that are commonly used nowadays in various magnetic
applications:

NdFeB (Neodymium-Iron-Boron) -- Or the so-called 'rare-earth' permanent magnets. They are very
powerful magnets as they have the highest (B, Br, BHmax) and high Hc. They are however very brittle,
hard to machine, and sensitive to corrosion and high temperatures. They are generally the most
expensive magnets .
Typical Magnetic Properties of NdFeB .

Grade
N5513
N5214
N4816
N4221
N3625
N3430

132

Residual Induction
(Gauss)
Br
15,000
14,700
14,100
13,200
12,400
11,900

Coercivity
(Oersteds)
Hc
12,000
10,300
12,700
12,000
11,100
10,700

Max. Energy
Prod
(MGOe)
BHmax
55
52
48
42
36
34

Material Information

Ferrite (Ceramic) -- Or the so-called 'hard ceramic' permanent magnets. They are generally made from
Strontium or Barium Ferrite. Lower in power (B, Br, BHmax) compared to other magnets, and are very
brittle. However, they have very high Hc and good Tc, and are quite corrosion-resistant. A very costeffective choice. Less expensive than NdFeB magnets, but still very powerful and resistant to
demagnetization.
Typical Magnetic Properties of Ferrite.

Grade
1
5
8
10

Residual Induction
(Gauss)
Br
2,200
3,950
3,900
4,200

Coercivity
(Oersteds)
Hc
1,900
2,400
3,200
2,950

Max. Energy
Prod
(MGOe)
BHmax
1.1
3.6
3.5
4.2

AlNiCo (Aluminum-Nickel-Cobalt) for medium strength and excellent machinability. They perform much
better than plain steel, but are much weaker in strength (lower B, Br and BHmax). They must be carefully
stored because they are prone to demagnetization.
Typical Magnetic Properties of AlNiCo .

Grade
5 Cast
5-7 Cast
6 Cast
8 Cast
2
Sintered
5
Sintered
8
Sintered

Residual
Induction (Gauss)
Br
12,500
13,500
10,500
8,300

Coercivity
(Oersteds)
Hc
640
740
780
1,650

Max. Energy
Prod (MGOe)
BHmax
5.5
7.5
3.9
5.5

6,600

550

1.4

10,800

600

3.8

7,000

1,900

5.0

SmCo (Samarium Cobalt)-- Or the so-called the 'first rare earth' magnets. They have high power and
resistance to high temperatures and corrosion. They are almost as powerful as NdFeB magnets, and far
more powerful than all the others (high B and Br). Usually only used where resistance to high
temperatures and corrosion are needed. Also very brittle and hard to machine. They are the most
expensive magnets.
Typical Magnetic Properties of SmCo .

Grade
S3214
S2818
S2818
S2712

Residual
Induction (Gauss)
Br
11,600
10,700
11,000
10,600

Coercivity
(Oersteds)
Hc
9,500
10,300
10,300
9,250

Max. Energy
Prod (MGOe)
BHmax
31
28
28
27
133

EMS User Guide

S1809

8,600

7,200

All the above magnetic properties tables are from www.intemag.com

134

18

Material Information

The B-H Curve of a Material


A B-H curve or the hysteresis loop is a property of all ferromagnetic materials. As its name indicates, it is a plot of
the magnetic flux density B against the magnetizing field H. It describes the cycles of magnet in a closed circuit as
it reaches saturation, demagnetized, saturated in the opposite direction, and then demagnetized again under the
influence of an external magnetic field.

In practice, only the B-H curve in the second quadrant or the so called the"Demagnetization Curve" is used. In
particular, if the air-gap dimensions of the magnetic circuit are kept fixed and neighboring fields are help constant,
the permanent magnet would have a static operating point. Else, such operating point will be any where on the
demagnetization curve. In such case, the device must be designed carefully to account for the movement of the
operating point.
In any magnetic device, the designer must carefully consider three quantities:

The residual induction or the remanence which is commonly denoted by the letter Br. It is the point
where the B-H curve intersects the B axis. In other words, it is always the value of flux density for the
condition when a magnet develops no magnetizing force (H=0). It is measured in Tesla in MKS units and
in Gauss in Gaussian units.
The Coercivity or the coercive force which is commonly denoted by the letter Hc. It is the point where
the B-H curve intersects the H axis. In other words, it is the magnetizing force required to reduce the
magnet's flux density B to zero. It is measured in Amperes per meter (A/m) in MKS units and in Oersted
in Gaussian units.
BHmax or the maximum energy product. It is the point where the product of magnetic flux density B and
the magnetic field H is at a maximum. Obviously, the higher is this product, the less volume of the
magnet is required.

It is very important to distinguish between hard and soft magnetic materials. The hard magnetic materials which
are also called permanent magnets are characterized by a B-H Curve that starts in the second quadrant and may
extend to the first quadrant. Whereas the B-H Curve of soft magnetic materials is limited to the first
quadrant. Consequently, if the user enters a B-H data where the first row has a negative value for H, EMS treats
that material as a permanent magnet. In such case, it automatically assigns a Coercivity (Hc) value equals to
minus the negative value of H specified in the first row of the B-H data. It also assigns a Remanence (Br) value
equals to that maximum B value in the specified B-H data.
Assigning a B-H Curve to a Material...

135

EMS User Guide

Assigning Materials to your Model


Before running an analysis, you must define all necessary material properties required by the corresponding
analysis. EMS comes with a material browser that you can use to assign material properties. It includes a default
material library. You can easily add other materials and define new libraries.
To assign a material from an existing material library file:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the icon of the desired body in the Solids folder of a study and
select Apply Material to All Bodies from the right-mouse menu.

2.
3.
4.
5.

The Material PM page opens.


From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired material library.
Click on (+) sign to open the desired material folder.
Click the desired material.

6.

Click OK

Note: After assigning a material to a component, a checkmark appears on the corresponding icon.

To add or insert a material library ...


To add a material to an existing library...

136

Material Information

Creating or Inserting a Materials Library


To create a new material library:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (the document name).

2.

Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3.

From the Material Database pull-down menu, select <New Material Library>.

4.

Type name of the new library. An empty material library with the specified name is added to the Material
PM.

5.

Click on Create/Edit Material.

6.

Type a folder's name.

7.

Type a material's name.

8.

Choose the material units. The default is MKS.

9.

Type the corresponding material properties.

10. Click OK

To insert an existing material library:


1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the assembly icon at the top of the tree and select Options.

2.
3.

Click System Options, Default Library.


To specify the path of material library:
a. Click Add.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
b.
c.
d.

4.

Navigate to the folder where library files exist and click OK. The library must have .emsmtr
extension.
Click Move Up or Move Down to change the folder search order.
Click Delete to delete a folder. To undo deleting a folder, click Cancel.

Click OK.

The material library whose path is specified above is now added to the material browser.

137

EMS User Guide

Adding a Material to an Existing Library


To add a new material to an existing library:

138

1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (the document name).

2.

Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3.

From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired library.

4.

Click on Create/Edit Material.

5.

Type a folder's name.

6.

Type a material's name.

7.

Choose the material units. The default is MKS.

8.

Type the corresponding material properties.

9.

Click OK

Material Information

Assigning a B-H Curve to a Material


Most of ferromagnetic materials exhibit a nonlinearity behavior where the permeability is function of the magnetic
field H, i.e. they have a B-H curve. Practically, material manufactures provide a B-H or a magnetization curve that
gives the magnetic flux B as a function of H. The user could input the B-H curve in MKS units (B in T and H in A/m)
or Gaussian units (B in Gauss and H in Oersted).
To specify a B-H curve:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the components icon in the Solids folder and select Apply Material
to All Bodies. The Material PM page opens.

2.

From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the material library name.

3.

Click on the proper folder.

4.

Click on Create/Edit Material. The new material PM page opens.

5.

Type the material name and choose the material units. The default is MKS.

6.

Under the Relative Permeability, select Non Linear Isotropic.

7.

Click on

an browse for a curve database

The function curves PropertyManager opens.


5.

Click Browse and open the .emscur curves library defined in Function Curves section .

7.

6. In the Curve Library box, do one of the following:


1. Select an existing B-H Curve from the available curves in the current library.
2. Right-click B-H Curve and select Create Curve to define a new B-H curve. The created curve
will be saved in the current library. In such case, you can either type pair of data in the table or
click on File and read in a text file.
click OK

Note: A B-H curve that starts in the second quadrant is treated by EMS as a permanent magnet or hard magnetic
material. In other words, if the user enters a B-H data where the first row has a negative value for H, EMS treats
that material as a permanent magnet. In such case, it automatically assigns a Coercivity (Hc) value equals to
minus the negative value of H specified in the first row of the B-H data. It also assigns a Remanence (Br) value
equals to that maximum B value in the specified B-H data.
The B-H Curve of a Material...

139

EMS User Guide

Assigning a Permanent Magnet


A permanent magnet has both magnitude and direction. The magnitude is a material property. The direction
depends on how the north and south poles of the magnet are positioned relative to the model. Therefore, the
assignment of a permanent magnet is carried out in 2 steps. The first step consists of specifying the coercivity
and remanence of the magnet. The second step consists of fixing the easy direction of the magnet relative to a
coordinate system.
To define a permanent magnet:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (project name).

2.

Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3.

From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired library.

4.

Click on Create/Edit Material.

5.

Type the a folder's name.

6.

Type the material name and choose the material units. The default is MKS.

7.

Take the default values for material properties. Do not specify any values for the permeability and the
permittivity.

8.

Scroll down to the Magnetization box and select Permanent Magnetization for the pull-down menu.

9.

Type the value of the Coercivity and of the Remanence. Pay attention to the units.

10. Click OK

To fix the easy direction of the permanent magnet relative to a coordinate system:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

140

Right-click on the body and select Direction of Coercivity. The click is on the body and not the component.
In the Coordinate System box, check the coordinate system in which the direction of coercivity is
defined. The default is the global coordinate system.
If you checked a local coordinate system, click inside the Local Coordinate System box. and choose an
existing local coordinate system. If such local system is not defined yet, exit the Direction of Coercivity
dialogue altogether and define a local coordinate system by using Insert->Reference Geometry->
Coordinate System and then repeat steps 1-3.
In the Direction Type box, check Cartesian, Cylindrical, or Spherical type. The default is Cartesian.
In the Direction box, click on the desired direction relative to that coordinate system. For example, the
possible directions for a Cartesian system is +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z.
Click OK

Material Information

Assigning an Orthotropic Material


A material is orthotropic if its electrical or magnetic properties are unique and independent in three mutually
perpendicular directions. Furthermore, the effective material tensor also depends on how it is placed relative to the
model. Therefore, the assignment of an orthotropic material is carried out in 2 steps. The first step consists of
specifying the diagonal properties along the three orthogonal axes of the material. The second step consists of
specifying the local coordinate system that defines the three orthogonal axes.
To define the material properties along the three axes:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (project name).


2.

Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3.

From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired library.

4.

Click on Create/Edit Material.

5.

Type the a folder's name.

6.

Type the material name and choose the material units. The default is MKS.

7.

Depending on the material, select Orthotropic under Relative Permeability, Relative Permittivity, or
Electric Conductivity boxes. Actually for Magnetic studies, only orthotropic permeability matters. Vice
versa, for Electric studies, only the orthotropic permittivity does. The conductivity could be orthotropic for
Electric Conduction studies but not for Magnetic studies. Whereas for Electric studies the
conductivity does not play any role because the components are assumed either perfectly conducting or
perfectly insulating.

8.

Specify the value of the corresponding quantity along the three orthogonal axes of the material.

9.

Click OK

To specify the material local coordinate system:


1.
2.
3.

Right-click on the body and select Coordinate System. The click is on the body and not the component.
In the Coordinate System box, check the coordinate system in which the three mutually orthogonal axes are
defined. The default is the global coordinate system.
If you checked a local coordinate system, click inside the Local Coordinate System box. and choose an
existing local coordinate system. If such local system is not defined yet, exit the Coordinate System
dialogue altogether and define a local coordinate system by using Insert->Reference Geometry->
Coordinate System and then repeat steps 1-3.

4.

Click OK

141

EMS User Guide

Using Drag and Drop to Define Materials


Once you defined material(s) for a study (source study), you can use drag and drop (or copy and paste) to define
materials for another study (target study) in one of the following ways:

142

Drag the Solids folder of an existing study (source study) and drop it on a compatible target study. All
material assignments in the source Solids folders will be copied to the target study.

Drag an icon in the Solids folder of a source study to the Solids folder of a compatible target study.

Use copy and paste to copy materials from one study to another.

Function Curves
About Function Curves
Function curves define pairs of values for use by different types of studies. The Function Curves dialog lets you
create and edit curve libraries.
NOTE: We recommend that you use this dialog to include all your frequently used curves to a library so that you
can use them conveniently in other studies and documents.

Curve Library. Click Open to load an existing library file or create a new one by pushing the New button.
The following types of function curves are available:

I-t Curve - Current-Time curve defines the current variation with time to be used in coils for
transient magnetic studies.
B-H Curve - defines the variation of the magnetic flux density versus the magnetic field for
ferromagnetic materials and permanent magnets.
P-B Curve - defines the variation of the magnetic flux density versus the magnetic field for
ferromagnetic materials and permanent magnets.
Vt Curve - defines the variation of the magnetic flux density versus the magnetic field for
ferromagnetic materials and permanent magnets.

The following topics are covered in this section:

Creating or Editing a Curve Library


Viewing a Curve Library

143

EMS User Guide

Creating or Editing a Curve Library


To create a new Curve Library or edit an existing one:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the top icon and select Define Function Curves.

The Function Curves dialog box appears.


2.
3.

4.
5.

Click Open to select an existing library file or click New to enter a name for a new library. The extension
of EMS Curve libraries is emscur.
In the Curve Library box, do one of the following:
Right-click I-t Curve and select Create Curve to define a current-time curve.
Right-click B-H Curve and select Create Curve to define a B-H curve.
Right-click P-B Curve and select Create Curve to define a P-B curve.
Right-click Vt Curve and select Create Curve to define a Vt curve.
In the Curve Name box, select the name of an existing curve to edit or a enter a name for a new curve.
In the Curve Data box, do the following:

Depending on the curve type, specify required units.


To import a curve from an external text file, click Import and browse
NOTE: The format of the file depends on the type of the curve.

6.
7.
8.

144

To add a new row, double-click in the Point column.


Fill in the columns as desired.
To delete a row, highlight it and click the Delete key or right-click it and select Delete.

Click View to create a graph of the curve


Repeat steps 3 through 6 to define as many curves as desired and then click OK.
Click Save to save the library. You can use the curves in the library in any study.

Function Curves

Viewing a Curve Library


To view a curve library :
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the top icon and select Define Function Curves.
The Function Curves dialog box appears.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Open to select an existing library or push the New button to enter a name for the new library. The
extension of EMS Curve library files is emscur.
In the Curve Library box, select the desired curve.
The curve data appears in the table and a graph appears in the Preview area.
Click OK.

145

Loads and Restraints


Loads and Restraints
Loads and restraints are necessary to define the electric and magnetic environment of the model. The results of
analysis directly depend on the specified loads and restraints. Loads and restraints are applied to geometric
entities as features that are fully associative to geometry and automatically adjust to geometric changes.
For example, if you apply a voltage to a face, all the nodes of that face are assigned the applied voltage. If you
modify the geometry such that the area of the face is changed, then again all the nodes of that face are assigned
that same applied voltage. Nevertheless, remeshing the model is required after any change in geometry to update
loads and restraints.
When you create a study, the program creates a Load/Restraint folder in the EMS Manager tree. EMS adds an
item in the Load/Restraint folder for each load or restraint you define on one or more entities.
The types of loads and restraints available depend on the type of the study. A load or restraint is applied by the
corresponding PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Load/Restraint folder of a study in the EMS
Manager tree, or by clicking EMS, Loads/Restraint.
NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Load/Restraint folders and items from one study
to another compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.
The following topics are discussed in this section:

Fixed Voltage
Floating Conductor
Contact Resistance
Charge Density
Total Charge
Normal Flux
Temperature
Convection
Heat Flux
Volume Heat
Summary of Loads and Restraints

147

EMS User Guide

Fixed Voltage
The fixed voltage restraint or boundary condition imposes a voltage on a face, component, or body. All the nodes
of the restrained face, component, or body are assigned the specified voltage. This type of restraint is only
applicable to Electrostatic and Electric Conduction analyses.
To apply a fixed voltage:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Fixed Voltage.


-orclick Fixed Voltage

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Fixed Voltage.


The Fixed Voltage PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2.

Click inside the Faces for Voltage box


voltage.

then select the face to which you want to apply the fixed

3.
4.

Click inside the Components or Bodies for Voltage box


bodies to which you want to apply the fixed voltage.
Type the voltage value in the Voltage value box in volts.

5.

Click OK

then select the components or

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic and Electric Conduction analyses.

148

Loads and Restraints

Floating Conductor
The floating conductor restraint has an unspecified voltage value. It is treated differently depending whether the
capacitance matrix is computed or not. That is, if the capacitance matrix is requested, the simulator assigns 1.0 or
0 V on the floating conductors and computes the matrix using the stored electric energy. On the other hand, if the
capacitance matrix is not requested, the floating conductor is treated as an equi-potential entity with unknown
voltage value, and thus solved for. Consequently, to treat the voltage on a floating conductor as unknown, the
capacitance matrix shall not be requested.
To apply a floating conductor:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Floating Conductor.


-orclick Floating Conductor

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Floating Conductor.


The Floating Conductor PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and
bodies.

2.

Click inside the Faces for Floating Conductor box


apply the fixed voltage.

then select the face to which you want to

3.

Click inside the Components or Bodies for Floating Conductor box


components or bodies to which you want to label as floating conductor.

4.

Click OK

then select the

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic analyses.

149

EMS User Guide

Contact Resistance
The Contact Resistance, in Ohms per square, load imposes a contact resistance on a face. It is used only for
Electric Conduction analysis.
To apply a Contact Resistance:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Contact Resistance.


-orclick Contact Resistance

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Contact Resistance.


The Contact Resistance PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2.
3.
4.

Click inside the Faces for Contact Resistance box


then select the face to which you want to
specify a contact resistance.
Type the value of the contact resistance in the Contact Resistance box. Its unit is in Ohms per
square.
Click OK

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction analyses.

150

Loads and Restraints

Charge Density
3

The charge density, in Coulombs per meter cubic (C/m ), load imposes a uniform charge distribution on
a component or body. This type of load is only applicable to Electrostatic analysis.
To apply a charge density:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Charge Density.


-orclick Charge Density

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Charge Density.


The Charge Density PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2.
3.

Click inside the Components or Bodies for Charge Density box


then select the components or
bodies to which you want to apply a charge density.
3
Type the value of the charge density in the Charge Density box. Its unit is in C/m

4.

Click OK

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic analyses.

151

EMS User Guide

Total Charge
The total charge , in Coulombs (C), load imposes a uniform charge distribution on a component or body. This
type of load is only applicable to Electrostatic analysis.
To apply a total charge :
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Total Charge .


-orclick Total Charge

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Total Charge .


The Total Charge PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2.
3.

Click inside the Components or Bodies for Total Charge box


then select the components or
bodies to which you want to apply a charge density.
Type the value of the charge density in the Total Charge box. Its unit is in C

4.

Click OK

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic analyses.

152

Loads and Restraints

Normal Flux
The Normal Flux boundary condition (NFBC) imposes a normal flux, i.e. tangential flux is zero, on a face.

Symmetry plane: If the model is symmetric and the flux density is normal to the plane of symmetry, use
this type of boundary condition. You can use symmetry to model a portion of the model instead of the full
model. When appropriate, taking advantage of symmetry can help you reduce the size of the problem
and obtain more accurate results.

This type of boundary condition is applicable to magnetic analyses only , i.e. Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and
Transient Magnetic.
To apply a normal flux:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Normal Flux.


-orclick Normal Flux

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Normal Flux.


The Normal Flux PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2.

Click inside the Faces for Normal Flux box


fixed voltage.

3.

Click OK

then select the face to which you want to apply the

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient
Magnetic analyses.

153

EMS User Guide

Modifying Loads and Restraints


To modify any load or restraint
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding load or restraint that you want to modify and select
Edit Definition.
The proper PropertyManager appears.

154

2.

Make the desired changes.

3.

Click OK

Loads and Restraints

Thermal Loads & Restraints


Temperature
The Temperature PropertyManager lets you define temperature boundary condition for use with thermal analysis.
This type of restraint is only applicable to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient
Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.
To apply a fixed temperature:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Temperature.
-orclick Temperature

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Temperature on the main menu.


The Temperature PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2.

Click inside the Faces box

3.

Click inside the Components or Bodies box


want to apply the temperature.
Under Temperature, do the following:

4.

5.

Set Temperature

Set Units

Click OK

then select the face to which you want to apply the temperature.
then select the components or bodies to which you

to the desired value.

to the units you want to use to enter the temperature value.

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC
Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's
Properties.

155

EMS User Guide

Convection
Use the Convection PropertyManager to apply convection boundary condition to selected components and bodies
of the model. This type of restraint is only applicable to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and
Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.
To apply a convection:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Convection.
-orclick Convection

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Convection on the main menu.


The Convection PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces only.

2.
3.

4.

Click inside the Components or Bodies box


you want to apply the convection.
Under Convection properties, do the following:

then select the components and bodies to which

Type a value for the Convection Coefficient

Type a value for the Bulk Ambient Temperature

Set Units

Click OK

in the selected unit system.

to the desired unit system.

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC
Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's
Properties.

156

Loads and Restraints

Heat Flux
The Heat Flux PropertyManager lets you apply heat flux to the selected faces. This type of restraint is only
applicable to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal
solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.
To apply a heat flux:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Heat Flux.
-orclick Heat Flux

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Heat Flux.


The Heat Flux PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces only.

2.
3.

4.

Click inside the Faces box


then select the face to which you want to apply the Heat Flux.
Under Heat Flux, do the following:

Type a value for the Heat Flux

Set Units
to the desired unit system.
Check Reverse direction box if desired

Click OK

. in the selected unit system.

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC
Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's
Properties.

157

EMS User Guide

Volume Heat
The Volume Heat PropertyManager lets you define Volume Heat boundary condition to the bodies and
components for use with thermal analysis. This type of restraint is only applicable to Electric Conduction,
Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in
the study's Properties.
To apply a volume heat:
1.

In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Volume Heat.
-orclick Volume Heat

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Volume Heat on the main menu.


The Temperature PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on bodies and components.

1.
2.
3.

4.

Click inside the Components or Bodies box


want to apply the volume heat.
Under Volume Heat, do the following:

Type a value for the Volume Heat

Set Units

Click OK

then select the components or bodies to which you

. in the selected unit system.

to the desired unit system.

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC
Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's
Properties.

158

Loads and Restraints

Summary of Loads and Restraints

The following table summarizes the loads and restraints and their application conditions.
LOAD/RESTRAINT
Fixed Voltage

ANALYSIS TYPE

Electrostatic
Electric
Conduction

GEOMETRICAL ENTITY

REQUIRED INPUT

UNITS

Faces
Components
Bodies

Voltage

Volts

Floating
Conductor

Electrostatic

Faces
Components
Bodies

Conductor Number

None

Charge
Density

Electrostatic

Components
Bodies

Charge Density

C/m

Faces

Contact Resistance

Ohms/Square

Faces

None

N/A

Contact
Resistance
Normal Flux

Electric
Conduction

Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Transient
Magnetic

Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Electrostatic
Electric
Conduction

Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Electrostatic
Electric
Conduction

Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Electrostatic
Electric
Conduction

Magnetostatic
AC Magnetic
Electrostatic
Electric
Conduction

THERMAL
LOAD/RESTRAINT

Temperature

Convection

Heat Flux

Volume Heat

Faces
Components
Bodies

Temperature

Faces

Convection
Coefficient
Bulk Temperature

Faces
Heat Flux

Components
Bodies

Temperature

159

Kelvin
Fahrenh
Celsius

SI
English (
Metric (G

SI
English (
Metric (G

Kelvin
Fahrenh
Celsius

EMS User Guide

160

Coils
About Coils
A coil literally means a multiple-turn winding of a conductor such as copper wire wound around a bobbin. When
the conducting windings carry current, a magnetic field is produced. In the context of EMS, it can also mean a solid
or a volume conductor carrying a current that produces a magnetic field. We make the distinction between the
former and the latter by calling them wound or stranded and solid coils, respectively.
When you create a Magnetic study, the program creates a Coils folder in the EMS Manager tree. EMS adds an
item in the Coils folder for each coil you define on one or more entities.
The coil properties depend on the type of the Magnetic study. A coil is applied by the corresponding
PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Coils folder of a Magnetic study in the EMS Manager tree, or by
clicking EMS, Coils.
NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Coils folders and items from one study to another
compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.
The following topics are discussed in this section:

Wound and Solid Coils


Coil Properties
Adding a Coil
Modifying a Coil
Summary of Coils

161

EMS User Guide

Wound and Solid Coils


A wound, or sometimes called stranded, coil is a multiple-turn winding of a conductor such as copper wire wound
around a bobbin. Whereas a solid or a volume coil is made of one bulk piece of conductor carrying a net
current. The total current flowing in a wound coil is just the current per turn multiplied by the number of turns (I =
N*Current/PerTurn). Whereas in a solid conductor, the total current is simply net current I flowing through it. If the
net current is the same, what is really the difference? It depends on the study type.

Magnetostatic Study
There is no induced current for Magnetostatic studies, thus the total current in the coil is just the applied
current. On the cross section of a wound coil, the applied current density is uniform. It is varying on a solid
coil. Consequently, the resulting field can be slightly different. However, the value of inductance is completely
different because it depends on the number of turns.

AC and Transient Magnetic Studies


For AC and Transient Magnetic studies, it is very important to make to the distinction between a wound and a solid
coil. The diameter of a wire turn is usually much smaller than the Skin Depth. In addition, individual turns are
separated by an insulting cover. Thus, a wound coil does not support Eddy Currents, i.e. induced currents. On the
other hand, a solid coil supports Eddy currents because the size of the conductor is usually larger than a Skin
Depth. The Eddy currents usually flow in opposite direction to the applied current in the coil.

Remember that coils are defined for Magnetic analyses only .

162

Coils

Coil Properties
Coils are defined only for Magnetic analyses, i.e. Magnetostatic, AC and Transient Magnetic. There is no limit on
the number of coils in a model. For each coil the net current as well as entry and exit ports must specified, as
explained below.

Net Current
In EMS, a coil must be current driven and a net current must be specified. Therefore, if you know the voltage, you
must obtain the corresponding net current because you won't be able to specify a voltage. If the coil is wound, both
the number of turns and the current per turn must be specified. In such case, the net current is simply: I = Number
of turns*Current/PerTurn. As for a solid coil, the net flowing current shall be specified. The current form depends
on the analysis type, as follows:

Magnetostatic: Specify just the magnitude of the current.


AC Magnetic: Specify both the magnitude and phase of the current.
Transient Magnetic: Specify a function curve that gives the current as a function of time.

Entry and Exit Ports


The net current does not give information about the direction of current flow in the coil. It is the current density that
gives such information. Therefore, it is necessary to specify an Entry Port and Exit Port of the coil. Such ports
must be planar and can be made up of many faces. The current density flows orthogonally into the Entry Port and
out of the Exit Port. Thus the ports specification gives the direction of the current flow. How about loop coils or the
so-called multiply connected coils? How to specify their ports?

Loops or closed Coils


Loop coils must be taken into consideration at the level of geometry creation. A planar port composed of one or
many faces where the current density flows orthogonal to must be made accessible. The following steps shall be
followed:

Divide the coil to at least to two separate components to have an inside face where an entry port condition
can be applied.
Hide one of the coil components in such away that the entry port face is visible and easily accessible.
For the Exit Port, check the "Same as Entry Port".
Bear in mind that the current flow convention: The current always flows into the Entry Port .

An example of a multiply-connected coil where it is broken to two parts

163

EMS User Guide

Entry and Exit Ports are planar faces. The current always flows into the Entry Port .

164

Coils

Current-Time Curve
For Transient Magnetic analysis, the current in the coil varies as function of time. Therefore, a current-time
function curve must be defined instead of a just a current quantity. The current-time curve may be defined even
before the creation of the coil and later imported into the coil when it is created. It can equally be defined with the
coil creation.

165

EMS User Guide

Adding a Coil
Coils are defined for Magnetic analyses. The process of adding a coil in EMS is about the same for all Magnetic
studies. However, there is a slight variation between wound and solid coils and the current form for different
analyses. Follow the links below to add a coil for the various analysis types:

166

Adding a coil to a Magnetostatic study


Adding a coil to an AC Magnetic study
Adding a coil to a Transient Magnetic study

Coils

Adding a Coil to Magnetostatic study


The only difference between a Wound and a Solid coil is the number of turns. Therefore, both procedures are
given below:
To add a coil to a Magnetostatic study:
1.

In a study, right-click the Coils folder and select Wound or Solid.


-orclick Wound

or Solid

on the EMS Loads toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Coils , Wound or Solid.


The Coils PropertyManager appears.

2.
3.

Select the coil type:


o Current Driven Coil
o Voltage Driven Coil
Enter extra Coil General Properties:
o Enter the fraction of this coil with respect to the actual coil. e.g. if you are modeling half of the
actual coil , enter 0.5.
o In case of a wound coil, enter either the AWG (American wire gage) value or the wire diameter..

4.

Click inside the Components or Bodies for Coils box


which you want to add to the coil

5.
6.

Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box


then select the faces that make up the Entry Port.
If the coil is a closed loop, check Same as Entry Port in Exit Port selection list.

7.

If it is not a closed loop, click inside the Faces for Exit Port box
Exit Port.
In case of Wound Coil:

8.

o
o

then select the components or bodies to

then select the faces that make up the

Type the number of turns in the Turns box


. It is an integer.
If current driven coil option is selected, Type the value of the current per turn in the Current per

Turn box
. The units in Amp-Turns.
If voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven properties ( voltage and serial
resistance) values.
In case of Solid Coil :
o If current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the net current in the Net Current box

9.

. The units in Amps.


If voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven properties ( voltage and serial
resistance) values.

10. Click OK

167

EMS User Guide

Adding a Coil to an AC Magnetic Study


The only difference between a Wound and a Solid coil is the number of turns. Therefore, both procedures are
given below.
To add a coil to an AC Magnetic study:
1.

In a study, right-click the Coils folder and select Wound or Solid.


-orclick Wound

or Solid

on the EMS Loads toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Coils , Wound or Solid.


The Coils PropertyManager appears.

2.

Select the coil type :

o
o
3.

Current Driven Coil


Voltage Driven Coil

Enter extra Coil General Properties:

o
o

Enter the fraction of this coil with respect to the actual coil. e.g. if you are modeling half of the
actual coil , enter 0.5.
In case of a wound coil, enter either the AWG (American wire gage) value or the wire diameter.

4.

Click inside the Components or Bodies for Coils box


which you want to add to the coil.

5.
6.

Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box


then select the faces that make up the Entry Port.
If the coil is a closed loop, check Same as Entry Port in Exit Port selection list.

7.

If it is not a closed loop, click inside the Faces for Exit Port box
Exit Port.
In case of Wound Coil:

8.

o
o

. The units in Amp-Turns.

In case of Solid Coil and current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the net current in the
Net RMS Current box

168

then select the faces that make up the

Type the number of turns in the Turns box


. It is an integer.
If current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the current per turn in the RMS Current per
Turn box

9.

then select the components or bodies to

. The units in Amps.

Coils

10. In case of Solid or Wound coil and current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the phase
in the Current phase box

. The units in degrees.

11. In case of Solid or Wound coil and if voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven
properties:

Enter the RMS voltage value.

o
o
o
o

Enter the voltage phase box


. The units in degrees.
Enter the serial resistance value in Ohms.
Enter the serial inductance value -Henry.
Enter the serial capacitance value in pF (1e-12F)

12. Click OK

169

EMS User Guide

Adding a Coil to a Transient Magnetic Study


The only difference between a Wound and a Solid coil is the number of turns. Therefore, both procedures are
given below:
To add a coil to a Transient Magnetic study:
1.

In a study, right-click the Coils folder and select Wound or Solid.


-orclick Wound

or Solid

on the EMS Loads toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Coils , Wound or Solid.


The Coils PropertyManager appears.
2.

3.

Select the coil type:


o Current Driven Coil
o Voltage Driven Coil
Enter extra Coil General Properties:
o In case of a wound coil, enter either the AWG (American wire gage) value or the wire diameter..
o Enter the fraction of this coil with respect to the actual coil. e.g. if you are modeling half of the
actual coil , enter 0.5.

4.

Click inside the Components or Bodies for Coils box then select the components or bodies to which
you want to add to the coil.

5.
6.

Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box


then select the faces that make up the Entry Port.
If the coil is a closed loop, check Same as Entry Port in Exit Port selection list.

7.

If it is not a closed loop, click inside the Faces for Exit Port box
Exit Port.

8.
9.

then select the faces that make up the

In case of Wound coil , type the number of turns in the Turns box
. It is an integer.
In case of Solid or Wound coil and If voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven
properties:
o Enter the serial resistance value in Ohms.
o Enter the serial inductance value in -Henry..
o Enter the serial capacitance value in pF (1e-12F)
10. In case of Solid or Wound coil and if voltage driven coil option is selected,

170

Select function from the list of voltage functions


o DC Voltage
o Exponential Voltage
o Pulse Voltage
o SFFM Voltage
o Sinusoidal Voltage
o Imported Voltage-Time Curve

Coils

Fill extra field values belonging to the selected function.

11. In case of Solid or Wound coil and If current driven coil option is selected:
o Select function from the list of current functions
o DC Current Source
o Exponential Current Source
o Pulse Current Source
o SFFM Current Source
o Sinusoidal Current Source
o Imported Current-Time Curve
o Fill extra field values belonging to the selected function.
12. In case of Imported Current-Time Curve selected as current source:

o
o
o

click to add a curve from a curve database button from the Current-Time Curve box
. This
command will place you in the Function Curves dialogue box.
In the Function Curves dialogue box, click Browse to select an existing library or enter a name for the
new library. The extension of EMS Curve libraries is emscur.
In the Curve Library box, do one of the following:

Select an existing I-t Curve from the available curves in the current library.
Right-click I-t Curve and select Create Curve to define a new current-time curve. The created
curve will be saved in the current library.
Click OK in the Function Curves dialogue box will take you back to Coils PropertyManager. The
current-time curve that you just added or defined will appear in the Curve Preview box.

13.

Click OK

171

EMS User Guide

Modifying a Coil
To modify a coil
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding coil that you want to modify and select Edit
Definition.
The proper PropertyManager appears.

172

2.

Make the desired changes.

3.

Click OK

Coils

Summary of Coils
The following table summarizes the coils and their properties.

173

EMS User Guide

174

Coils

You can have a coil with a zero net current. Useful, if you have a receiving coil where you want to compute the
induced voltage.

175

Forces and Torques


About Forces and Torques
The majority of electromagnetic devices convert electromagnetic energy to mechanical energy or vice versa.
Practically speaking, there is a vast number of motors and generators that use this same principal. In these devices,
we attempt to generate mechanical forces such that the moving parts of the device can perform work. Similarly,
there are other types of devices that convert one form of electric energy to another such as transformers, converts,
and inverts.
EMS computes force distributions on each node in the appropriate regions which depends on the analysis type. For
instance, the nodal force distribution is computed only for fixed-voltage conductors in case of Electrostatic
analysis; while it is computed for all coils and ferromagnetic media when it comes to Magnetostatic analysis. This
type of force is automatically computed without any input from the user. After a successful run, the program
creates a Force Distribution folder in the EMS Manager tree. The user can then right-click on the folder and
define the desired force distribution plot. In other words, the user input for this type of force is after running the
study.
EMS also computes the so called the rigid body force. Unlike the force distribution method, this type of force
actually requires the user input before running the study. That is, the user has to decide a priori on which
components the force and torque shall be computed. EMS makes it convenient by creating a Forces/Torques
folder in the Manager tree for all study types except for Electric Conduction. EMS adds an item in the
Forces/Torques folder for each force set you define on one or more entities. It is worth mentioning that the rigid
body must be completely enclosed by air. The output for this type of calculation, which is included in the study
report and results table, is a force/torque vector for each force set.
A force/torque is applied by the corresponding PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Forces/Torques
folder of a study in the EMS Manager tree, or by clicking EMS, Forces/Torques.
NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Forces/Torques folders and items from one study
to another compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.
The following topics are discussed in this section:

Force Computation Methods


Computing a Force/Torque
Modifying a Force/Torque
Summary of Force/Torque

177

EMS User Guide

Forces can be calculated in several ways including:

The Lorentz Force or JxB Method


The Virtual Work Method
The Maxwell Stress Method (Not used in CosmosEMS)

The Lorentz Force Method


The method is used to calculate the force acting on a conductor carrying a current I and located in a magnetic field
whose magnetic flux density is B. That is,

J is the current density either input and therefore known or computed in an eddy current region.
Similarly, the torque is given by

It is worth clarifying a possible confusion here. That is, for AC magnetic analysis both J and B are complex
quantities and are time dependent in the form of ejt. The force calculated by the program is the time average force
which is given by:

This Lorentz method is very useful for finding forces acting on conductors. However, it is of limited use for nonconducting regions.

The Virtual Work Method


This method consists of finding the change in the total magnetic energy when the object is displaced a distance s
in the direction of the force component we week. That is, the force in the s direction is

where

The torque is obtained by rotating the component a around x-, y-, or z-axis.

178

Forces and Torques

This method of force calculation is well suited since the finite element method starts for an energy minimization any
way. Furthermore, since the stored magnetic energy is global quantity, it is rather less sensitive to local errors.
Again for AC Magnetic analysis, we calculate the time average of the force.

The Maxwell Stress Method


The Maxwell Stress Method uses the magnetic field H on the surface of the object. That is,

This method is generally yields good results but it is very sensitive to local errors which make it unstable, especially
in very small air gaps. For this reason, EMS does not use it for force calculation.

179

EMS User Guide

Force Computation Methods


Electromagnetic forces and torques can be calculated in several ways including:

The Lorentz Force or JxB Method


The Virtual Work Method
The Maxwell Stress Method (Not used in CosmosEMS)

The Lorentz Force Method


The method is used to calculate the force acting on a conductor carrying a current I and located in a magnetic field
whose magnetic flux density is B. That is,

J is the current density either input and therefore known or computed in an eddy current region.
Similarly, the torque is given by

It is worth clarifying a possible confusion here. That is, for AC magnetic analysis both J and B are complex
j t
quantities and are time dependent in the form of e . The force calculated by the program is the time average force
which is given by:

This Lorentz method is very useful for finding forces acting on conductors. However, it is of limited use for nonconducting regions.
In EMS, it is available for Magnetostatic, AC and Transient Magnetic studies.

The Virtual Work Method


This method consists of finding the change in the total magnetic energy when the object is displaced a distance s
in the direction of the force component we week. That is, the force in the s direction is

where

180

Forces and Torques

The torque is obtained by rotating the component a around x-, y-, or z-axis.

This method of force calculation is well suited since the finite element method starts for an energy minimization any
way. Furthermore, since the stored magnetic energy is global quantity, it is rather less sensitive to local errors.
Again for AC Magnetic analysis, we calculate the time average of the force.
In EMS, it is available for all type of studies except the Electric Conduction.

The Maxwell Stress Method


The Maxwell Stress Method uses the magnetic field H on the surface of the object. That is,

This method is generally yields good results but it is very sensitive to local errors which make it unstable, especially
in very small air gaps. For this reason, EMS does not use it for force calculation.

181

EMS User Guide

Computing a Force/Torque
EMS automatically computes the nodal force distribution without any user input. However, for the rigid body force
calculation the user must decide before hand which parts that constitute the rigid body on which the force/torque
shall be calculated. The following steps highlight the procedure for choosing a force that must be followed before
running the study.
To define a force set:
1.

In a study, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and select Virtual Work or Lorentz Force.
-orclick Virtual Work

or Lorentz Force on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Forces/Torques, Virtual Work or Lorentz Force.


The Forces/Torques PropertyManager appears.

2.
3.

Click inside the Components and Bodies for Forces/Torques box


then select the components
and bodies that make up the rigid body.
By default the torque center is at the origin of the global coordinate system. If a center other than the
origin is desired, check At another Point in the Torque Center selection list. Then click inside the
Point for Torque Center box

4.

Click OK

then select a point. The point must already exist.

Remember that Force/Torque is applicable only to Electrostatic , Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and


Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.

182

Forces and Torques

Modifying a Force/Torque
To modify a force/torque set:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding force/torque set that you want to modify and select
Edit Definition.
The proper PropertyManager appears.

2.

Make the desired changes.

3.

Click OK

183

EMS User Guide

Summary of Forces/Torques
EMS automatically computes the nodal force distribution without any user input. However, for the rigid body force
calculation the user must decide before hand which parts that constitute the rigid body on which the force/torque
shall be calculated. The following table gives a summary of force and torque calculations for rigid bodies:

ANALYSIS TYPE

VIRTUAL
WORK

LORENTZ
FORCE

Electrostatic

YES

NO

Electric
Conduction

NO

NO

Magnetostatic

YES

YES

AC Magnetic

YES

YES

REMARKS

Transient
Magnetic

184

YES

YES

The rigid body must be


completely enclosed by
air.
A rigid body could be
made up of many
components and bodies.
By default, the torque
center is at the global
origin (0,0,0).
The force is output in
Newtons and the torque
in Newton-meters.
The force and torques
vectors are included in
the study report.

Resistance
About Resistance
Electrical resistance is a measure of the extent to which an object opposes the flow of an electric current. It is
equal to voltage/current. The MKS unit of electrical resistance is the ohm. Its reciprocal quantity is electrical
conductance measured in siemens.
In EMS the current flow problem is addressed in the Electric Conduction analysis. The user has to decide before
running the study in which components the resistance is desired to be computed. EMS makes it convenient by
creating a Resistance folder in the Manager tree for Electric Conduction studies. EMS adds an item in the
Resistance folder for each resistance set you define on one or more entities.
A resistance is applied by the corresponding PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Resistance folder of
a study in the EMS Manager tree, or by clicking EMS, Resistance .
NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Resistance folders and items from one study to
another compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.
The following topics are discussed in this section:

Computing a Resistance

185

EMS User Guide

Computing a Resistance
The Electric Conduction module computes the resistance. The resistance is defined as Voltage/Current. The
voltage is defined between two points. Therefore, the user has to specify the entry and exit ports for the resistor set.
The entry port is where the current flows into the resistor set and exit port is where the current exits. EMS
automatically computes the voltage difference between the entry and exit ports as well as the current flowing
through the resistor set. From the current and voltage, the resistance is deduced.
To define a resistance set:
1.

In a Electric Conduction study, right-click the Resistance fold and select Define.
-orclick Resistance

on the EMS toolbar.

-orclick EMS, Resistance


The Resistance PropertyManager appears.

2.

Click inside the Components and Bodies for Resistance box


bodies that make up the resistance set.

3.

Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box


4. Click inside the Faces for Exit Port box

4.

Click OK

then select the components and

then select the faces that make up the Entry Port.


then select the faces that make up the Exit Port.

Resistance computation is available only for Electric Conduction analysis.

186

Resistance

Modifying a Resistance Set


To modify a resistance set:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding resistance set that you want to modify and select
Edit Definition.
The proper PropertyManager appears.

2.

Make the desired changes.

3.

Click OK

187

Capacitance
Computing Capacitance Matrix
Capacitance is a measure of the amount of electric charge stored for a given electric potential between conductors.
Capacitance exists between any two conductors insulated from one another. It is usually defined as the total
electric charge placed on the object divided by the potential of the object: The MKS unit of capacitance is the farad
(F). A capacitance of one farad results in a potential of one volt for one coulomb of charge. The capacitance of the
majority of capacitors used in electronic circuits is several orders of magnitude smaller than the farad. The most
common units of capacitance in use today are the microfarad (F), the nanofarad (nF) and the picofarad (pF).
For N conductors system, the capacitance is a NxN matrix where C ii is called self capacitance and Cij is called
mutual capacitance. A self capacitance is generally defined as the amount of electric charge necessary to
increase its electrical potential by one volt. A mutual inductance is generally defined as the capacitance between
two conductors when the effect of all other conductors is removed.
Since the capacitance is a matrix, the conductors in the model must be numbered consecutively. In EMS, we
make use of the concept of Floating Conductor to number the conductors. Internally, EMS assigns a 1 volt on
each floating conductor. The 1 volt assigned is actually arbitrary because the capacitance does not depend on the
applied voltage. However, the conductor number is important.
To compute the capacitance matrix in EMS:

Use the Electrostatic module.


Assign a Floating Conductor restrain to each conductor in the system.
Using the Fixed Voltage restraint, assign a zero volt to all grounded conductors.

The capacitance matrix is output to the Study Report and Results Table

Capacitance computation is available only for Electrostatic analysis.

189

Circuit Parameters
Computing Circuit Parameters
This process of generating an electrical current in a conductor by placing the conductor in a changing magnetic
field is called electromagnetic induction or just induction. It is called induction because the current is said to be
induced in the conductor by the magnetic field. When induction occurs in an electrical circuit and affects the flow
of electricity it is called inductance, L. Self-inductance, or simply inductance is the property of a circuit whereby a
change in current causes a change in voltage in the same circuit. When one circuit induces current flow in a
second nearby circuit, it is known as mutual-inductance. Inductance is expressed in henrys.
The effect of inductance can be understood using a single loop of wire as an example. If a voltage is suddenly
applied between the ends of the loop of wire, the current must change from zero to non-zero. However, a non-zero
current induces a magnetic field by Ampere's law. This change in the magnetic field induces an emf that is in the
opposite direction of the change in current. The strength of this emf is proportional to the change in current and the
inductance. When these opposing forces are in balance, the result is a current that increases linearly with time
where the rate of this change is determined by the applied voltage and the inductance.
For N coils system, the inductance is a NxN matrix where Lii is the self inductance and Lij is the mutual
inductance. Therefore, the coils have to be numbered consecutively. Upon the user request, EMS computes the
Circuit Parameters matrices for the Magnetic analyses. The computation of the circuit parameters necessitates
additional computational time. Therefore, unless the user needs it, the circuit parameters should not be computed
to save CPU time.
The product of the flux passing through a coil with the number of turns of that coil is called flux linkage ( =
N). The flux linkage gives an indication of how the magnetic flux generated by one turn of the coil is linked to
adjacent turns of the coil. This quantity is also equal to the product of the inductance with the current ( = LI). It is
therefore also computed if the user chooses to compute circuit parameters.
Another important quantity which is also computed with the inductance is induced voltage in each coil. However, it
is computed only for AC Magnetic analysis because it is equal to the time derivative of the flux linkage with
respect to time (V = d /dt).
To compute the inductance matrix, flux linkage, and the induced voltage in EMS:

Use the Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, or Transient Magnetic.


Check Compute Circuit Parameters in the study property.
Starting from 1 assign consecutive numbers to each coil.

The inductance matrix, flux linkage, and the induced voltage and others quantities are output to the Study Report
and Results Table.

The induced voltage is available only for AC Magnetic analysis.

191

Meshing
Background on Meshing
Finite Element Analysis (FEA) provides a reliable numerical technique for analyzing engineering designs. The
process starts with the creation of a geometric model. Then, the program subdivides the model into small pieces of
simple shapes (elements) connected at common points (nodes). Finite element analysis programs look at the
model as a network of discrete interconnected elements.
The Finite Element Method (FEM) predicts the behavior of the model by combining the information obtained from
all elements making up the model.
Meshing is a very crucial step in design analysis. The automatic mesher in EMS generates a mesh based on a
global element size, tolerance, and local mesh control specifications. Mesh control lets you specify different sizes
of elements for components and faces.
EMS estimates a global element size for the model taking into consideration its volume, surface area, and other
geometric details. The size of the generated mesh (number of nodes and elements) depends on the geometry and
dimensions of the model, element size, mesh tolerance, and mesh control. In the early stages of design analysis
where approximate results may suffice, you can specify a larger element size for a faster solution. For a more
accurate solution, a smaller element size may be required.
This section discusses the following topics:

Meshing Parameters
Meshing Options
Controlling the Mesh
Mesh Quality Checks
Meshing Failure Diagnostics
Meshing Tips

193

EMS User Guide

Meshing Parameters
The mesh is generated by right clicking the Mesh icon in the EMS Manager tree and selecting Create. The
generated mesh depends on the following factors:

Active mesh options


Mesh control specifications
Global element size and tolerance

NOTE: It is recommended that you verify all these factors before meshing. Any change in these factors requires
remeshing. The Options button in the Mesh PropertyManager provides a convenient access to check meshing
preferences. Right-click the Mesh icon and select Details to view how an existing mesh was generated.

194

Meshing

Rebuilding the Mesh


You can use one mesh for multiple studies to investigate the effect of using different materials, loads, and
restraints. However, to consider the impact of geometry changes on the results, you must rebuild the mesh and
rerun the study after making any change in geometry. The new mesh is used in subsequent runs. However, you
can still view the old mesh and results associated with a study. If you rerun a study after rebuilding the mesh, the
new mesh is used and all old results are overwritten.
To run a study using its old mesh:
1.

Click the study icon in the EMS Manager tree.


The study becomes active.

2.
3.

Right-click the Mesh icon and select Show Mesh.


Right-click the Study icon and select Run.

195

EMS User Guide

Automatic Looping
Automatic looping instructs the mesher to automatically retry to mesh the model using a smaller global element
size. You control the maximum number of trials allowed and the ratio by which the global element size and
tolerance are reduced each time.
To enable and set automatic looping options:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Create.
The Mesh PropertyManager appears.

2.

Click Options.
The Options dialog box appears with the Mesh tab selected.

3.

4.

196

Under Automatic looping, do the following:


a. Check Enable automatic looping for solids.
b. Set No. of loops, Global element size factor for each loop, and Tolerance factor for each
loop.
Click OK.

Meshing

Meshing Options
Meshing Options are essential factors in determining the quality of the mesh and hence the results. Results based
on different preference settings should converge to each other if an adequately small element size is used.
Element Growth Rate is the maximum ratio between two neighboring elements. The default value is 1.4 which is
adequate for most problems.
Accurate Curvature Representation option, when checked, the mesher follows accurately curved surfaces. The
default value is 12 which the maximum angle between the normal to the surface and the normal to the mesh faces.
Automatic looping instructs the mesher to automatically retry to mesh the model using a smaller global element
size. You control the maximum number of trials allowed and the ratio by which the global element size and
tolerance are reduced each time.
Setting the meshing Options

197

EMS User Guide

Mesh
The Mesh PropertyManager allows you to mesh the model.

Mesh Parameters. Sets the global element size, tolerance, and options.
o Slider bar. The slide bar lets you change the global element size and tolerance. The extreme left
position (Coarse) sets the global element size to twice the default size. The extreme right position
(Fine) sets the global element size to half the default size.

Global Size
. Sets the global average element size. EMS suggests a default value based on
the model volume and surface area. The global element size is given in the default SolidWorks unit
of length.

Tolerance

. Sets the tolerance value. The default tolerance is 5% of the global element size.

NOTE: Adjusting the tolerance can help resolve some meshing problems. For example, if meshing
fails due to free edges, increasing the tolerance can solve the problem. The tolerance cannot exceed
30% of the element size.

o Reset to default size. Resets the Global Size field to the default value suggested by the program.
Run analysis after meshing. If checked, EMS runs the study right after finishing the meshing of the
model successfully.
Options. Click this button to check or modify the active meshing options.

To mesh a model:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Create.
The Mesh PropertyManager appears.

2.
3.
4.

Under Mesh Parameters, set the Global Size


and Tolerance
values.
If you want to use the default element size, click Reset to default size.
To check the active meshing options, click Options.
The Options dialog box appears with the Mesh tab selected.

5.
6.
7.

198

Check and modify the desired meshing options and click OK.
To instruct the program to run the study right after meshing the model, check Run analysis after
meshing.
Click OK.

Meshing

Controlling the Mesh


Mesh Control Parameters
Mesh control refers to specifying different element sizes at different regions in the model. A smaller element size in
a region improves the accuracy of results in that region. You can specify mesh control at faces and components.
To access the Mesh Control PropertyManager, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Control.

Mesh Control Parameters


The only mesh control parameter is the element size for the specified entities.
To apply mesh control to mixed types of entities:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Mesh Control.
The Mesh Control PropertyManager appears.

2.

Click inside the Components and Bodies for Mesh Control box
bodies to which you want to apply a mesh control.

3.

Click inside the Faces for Mesh Control box


control.

4.

Under Control Parameters, type a value in the Element Size box

5.

Click OK

then select the components and

then select the face to which you want to apply a mesh


.

The transition between the dense and coarse mesh is overall controlled by the Element Growth Rate set at
the mesh options level. The default value is 1.4

199

EMS User Guide

Mesh Control Parameters


Mesh control refers to specifying different element sizes at different regions in the model. A smaller element size in
a region improves the accuracy of results in that region. You can specify mesh control at faces and components.
To access the Mesh Control PropertyManager, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Control.

Mesh Control Parameters


The only mesh control parameter is the element size for the specified entities.
To apply mesh control to mixed types of entities:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Mesh Control.
The Mesh Control PropertyManager appears.

2.

Click inside the Components and Bodies for Mesh Control box
bodies to which you want to apply a mesh control.

3.

Click inside the Faces for Mesh Control box


control.

4.

Under Control Parameters, type a value in the Element Size box

5.

Click OK

then select the components and

then select the face to which you want to apply a mesh


.

The transition between the dense and coarse mesh is overall controlled by the Element Growth Rate set at
the mesh options level. The default value is 1.4

200

Meshing

Mesh Control Examples


The following examples illustrate mesh control on various entities of a model.

Mesh control applied to faces

Mesh control applied to a component

201

EMS User Guide

Failure Diagnostics
When meshing fails, EMS gives a message and stops unless the automatic mesh looping is active. A failure
diagnostics tool is provided to help you locate and resolve solid meshing problems.
The meshing of a solid component consists of two basic phases. In the first phase, the mesher places nodes on
the boundary. This phase is called surface meshing. If the first phase is successful, the mesher starts the second
phase where it creates nodes in the inside, fills the volume with tetrahedral elements. Failure can occur during one
of the two phases.
The Failure Diagnostics PropertyManager lists and highlights the components that failed. For each component, it
lists and highlights the faces and edges that caused the failure.

Failed Components

Failed Faces

. Lists all components that failed during meshing.

. Lists all faces that failed during meshing.

To identify failing components:


1.
2.

After meshing has failed, right-click the Mesh icon and select Failure Diagnostics.
To identify the problem with a component, select it in the list box.
All faces of the selected component that caused the meshing to fail highlight in the graphics area.

3.

To identify a failing face, select it in the list box.


Selected face highlights in the graphics area.

202

Meshing

Meshing Tips

When you mesh a study, EMS meshes all unsuppressed solids.


For assemblies, check component interference. To detect interference in an assembly, click Tools,
Interference Detection. Any interference should be fixed before meshing the model.

If meshing fails, use the Failure Diagnostics tool to locate the cause of mesh failure. Try the proposed
options to solve the problem. You can also try different element size, define mesh control, or activate
Enable automatic looping for solids.
It is good practice to check mesh options before meshing. For example, an Element Growth Rate
smaller than 1.25 or a Accurate Curvature Representation parameter less than 10 can result in
generating an unnecessarily large number of elements for models with many small features. The
Automatic looping can help solve meshing problems automatically, but you can adjust its settings for a
particular model.
To improve results in important areas, use mesh control to set a smaller element size. When meshing an
assembly with a wide range of component sizes, default meshing results in a relatively coarse mesh for
small components. Component mesh control offers an easy way to give more importance to the
selected small components. Use this option to identify important small components.

203

Viewing Results
Viewing Analysis Results
You view the results after running a study. In viewing the results, you can generate plots, lists, graphs, and reports
depending on the study and result types. In this section, you learn about the following topics:

Plotting Results

Graphing Results

Manipulating Result Plots

You may also view the lumped quantities such as capacitance, inductance, force, and power in a tabulated format
as follows:
1.
2.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on Report folder or click


Select Results Table.

on tool bar..

205

EMS User Guide

Compare Studies Results


The Compare Studies Results option allows you to do the following:

Browse the results table of all studies of a given study type in the same window.
Generate a 2D graph of selected parameter results along all checked studies in the studies list
Export the checked studies results to a text file or an excel sheet.

You ca access the Compare Studies Results dialog by right clicking on the root item of EMS Manager tree, a menu
pops-up, select Compare Studies Results, a sub menu pops-up, select the available type of studies you wish to
compare. A study type is available for comparison whenever you have two or more studies of that type with results.
The Compare Studies dialog Popup.

For example, to view the results of Study 1 you select the Study 1 item in the Studies list .
To compare results of a given parameter by generating a 2D graph you do the following:
Check All / Uncheck All : Use this button to select or unselect all existents studies .
Add Parameter button : To compare results of a given parameter by generating a 2D graph you need to select a
cell from one of the above grid results and click this button to add this parameter to the " Parameter (s) to plot "
list.
Plot button : Click this button to popup a 2D graph plot of the added parameter (s) for the checked (selected)
studies.
206

Viewing Results

Export button: Click this button to export results of checked studies to a text file or excel sheet.
Print button: Click this button to print the results of checked studies.

207

EMS User Guide

Plotting Results
Plotting Results
EMS generates result folders in the EMS Manager tree automatically after running a study successfully. The
names of the result folders depend on the study type. There are two type of plots available to all results folder.

3D Plots
Again, the finite element method meshes the model into many tetrahedral elements effectively replacing a complex
problem by many simple problems that need to be solved simultaneously. Tetrahedral elements share
common nodes and edges. Generally speaking, the user would be interested in uncovering the value of the
unknown fields at the nodes since they represent the discretized space. A convenient way is to give a color map
of the values at all the nodes in 3D space. This type of 3D plot is very popular in all finite element
disciplines. EMS offers this type of plot for all field quantities that can have a distributed value at each node.
EMS automatically generates a 3D plot in each folder and can be displayed by double-clicking the icon in the
Manager tree. Plots are displayed in a different window from the model geometry. You can toggle between the
model and the results window by clicking on the corresponding tab at the lower left corner of the graphics area. To
activate the model geometry window click on the Model tab. To activate the results window click on the Plot
Results tab.
Since the model and the results are conveniently managed in two separate windows, each has its own View
Toolbar. The model has the regular SolidWorks toolbar.

Whereas, the results have the following view toolbar:

When you click on he Model tab, the results toolbar is deactivated in order to avoid confusion between the two
toolbars.
You can define plots by right-clicking a result folder in the EMS Manager tree and selecting 3D.
EMS generates the following result plots:

208

Electric Potential Plot


Electric Field Plot
Electric Displacement Plot
Current Density Plot
Magnetic Flux Density Plot
Magnetic Field Plot
Applied Current Density Plot
Current Density Plot
Force Density Plot
Losses Density Plot
Compute Flux
Compute Voltage
Temperature

Viewing Results

Temperature Gradient
Heat Flux

2D Plots
3D plots are instructive. However, they may not show the exact value at a particular location in the model. For
some applications, knowing the exact value of the field at such location is crucial to the design. Thus the need for
a 2D type of plot that gives the exact numerical value instead of a just a color map. EMS has two ways of
producing this type of plot:

Graphing of Probed Results Plots


Graphing Results on a Line Segment

209

EMS User Guide

Electric Potential Plot


The Electric Potential Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot electric potential or the voltage results for
Electrostatic and Electric Conduction studies. You can access the Electric Potential Plot PropertyManager after
a successful run of your study. Since the electric potential is a scalar, they are no components to choose from nor
is there a vector plot type. That is, the only fringe plot type is available.

Display

Select Units
. Select the units of the electric potential plot.
Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only if motion analysis option is checked

o Time
. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.

o
o
o
o

Point. Uses colored point contours.


Line. Uses colored line contours.
Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.

The electric potential plot is available only for Electrostatic and Electric Conduction analyses.

210

Viewing Results

Electric Field Plot


The Electric Field Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot electric field results for Electrostatic ,Electric
Conduction , Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Electric Field Plot PropertyManager
after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an electric field component to plot. Directions are based on the global
coordinate system.
o Ex: Electric Field in the X direction
o Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction
o Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction
o Er: Resultant Electric Field

Select Units
. Select the units of the electric field plot.
Plot Type .
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all electric field components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant electric field vector. You can control the size and density of the
vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only if motion analysis option is checked.

Time
. Displays the motion time corresponding to the selected plot motion time step.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.

In case of Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies the following extra properties will be displayed:

Part

o
o
o

Real
Imaginary
Magnitude
Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

The electric field plot is available only for Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC
Magnetic analyses.

211

EMS User Guide

Electric Displacement Plot


The Electric Displacement (D) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot electric field results for Electrostatic
studies. You can access the Electric Displacement Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an electric displacement component to plot. Directions are based on
the global coordinate system.
o Dx: Electric Displacement in the X direction
o Dy: Electric Displacement in the Y direction
o Dz: Electric Displacement in the Z direction
o Dr: Resultant Electric Displacement

Select Units
. Select the units of the electric displacement plot.
Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only if motion analysis option is checked

o Time
. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.
Plot Type .
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all electric displacement components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant electric displacement vector. You can control the size and density
of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.

o
o
o
o

Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.


Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
Lines. Uses colored line contours.
Points. Uses colored point contours.

The electric displacement plot is available only for Electrostatic analyses.

212

Viewing Results

Current Density Plot


The Current Density Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot current density results for Electric Conduction
studies. You can access the Current Density Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an current density component to plot. Directions are based on the
global coordinate system.
o Jx: Current Density in the X direction
o Jy: Current Density in the Y direction
o Jz: Current Density in the Z direction
o Jr: Resultant Current Density

Select Units
. Select the units of the current density plot.
Plot Type .
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all current density components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant current density vector. You can control the size and density of the
vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only if motion analysis option is checked.

Time
. Displays the motion time corresponding to the selected plot motion time step.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The electric field plot is available only for Electric Conduction analyses.

213

EMS User Guide

Magnetic Flux Density Plot


The Magnetic Flux Density (B) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot magnetic flux density results for
Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Magnetic Flux Density Plot
PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an magnetic flux density component to plot. Directions are based on
the global coordinate system.
o Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction
o By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction
o Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction
o Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density

Select Units
. Select the units of the magnetic density flux plot.
Plot Type .
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all magnetic flux density components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant magnetic flux density vector. You can control the size and density
of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.


o Real
o Imaginary
o Magnitude
Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

The magnetic flux density plot is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

214

Viewing Results

Magnetic Field Plot


The Magnetic Field (H) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot magnetic field results for Magnetostatic, AC
Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Magnetic Field Plot PropertyManager after a
successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an magnetic field component to plot. Directions are based on the global
coordinate system.
o Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction
o Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction
o Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction
o Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field

Select Units
. Select the units of the magnetic field plot.
Plot Type.
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all magnetic field components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant magnetic field vector. You can control the size and density of the
vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.


o Real
o Imaginary
o Magnitude
Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree .Available only for AC Magnetic studies.

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

The magnetic field plot is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

215

EMS User Guide

Applied Current Density Plot


The Applied Current Density (Ja) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot applied current density results for
Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Applied Current Density Plot
PropertyManager after a successful run of your study. This type of plot is available only if the model has at least
one coil.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an applied current density component to plot. Directions are based on
the global coordinate system.
o Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction
o Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction
o Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction
o Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density

Select Units
. Select the units of the applied current density plot.
Plot Type.
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all applied current density components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant applied current density vector. You can control the size and density
of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.


o Real
o Imaginary
o Magnitude
Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

The applied current density plot is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic
analyses. The model must have at least one coil.

216

Viewing Results

Current Density Plot


Note: The Current Density (Je) use to be called in all previous EMS versions Eddy Current Density (Je) .
The Current Density (Je) PropertyManager allows you to plot current density results for AC Magnetic and
Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Current Density Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of
your study.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an current density component to plot. Directions are based on the
global coordinate system.
o Jex: Current Density in the X direction
o Jey: Current Density in the Y direction
o Jez: Current Density in the Z direction
o Jer: Resultant Current Density

Select Units
. Select the units of the current density plot.
Plot Type.
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all current density components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant current density vector. You can control the size and density of the
vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.


o Real
o Imaginary
o Magnitude
Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

The current density plot is available for AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

217

EMS User Guide

Force Density Plot


Note: Force Density ( F) used to be called Force Distribution (F) in all previous EMS versions.
The Force Density (F) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot force density results for Electrostatic,
Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Force Density Plot
PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an force density component to plot. Directions are based on the global
coordinate system.
o Fx: Force in the X direction
o Fy: Force in the Y direction
o Fz: Force in the Z direction
o Fr: Resultant Force

Select Units
. Select the units of the force plot.
Plot Type.
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all force components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant force vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in
a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.
Force Type . Select either virtual work or Lorentz force type. For Electrostatic analysis, only the virtual
work method is available.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

The force plot is available for Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic
analyses. In other words, it is not available only for Electric Conduction analysis.

218

Viewing Results

Losses Density Plot


The Losses Density plot PropertyManager allows you to plot loss density results for AC Magnetic studies when
the Split Core Loss option is checked. You can access the Losses Density Plot PropertyManager after a successful
run of your study.

Display

Select Loss Type. Select an Losses density type to plot.


o Ohmic Loss
o Eddy Loss
o Hysterisis Loss
o Excess Loss
o Core Loss

Select Units
. Select the units of the loss plot.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

The Loss plot is available for AC Magnetic analyses only and the Split Core Loss option must be checked.

219

EMS User Guide

Compute Flux
The Compute Flux PropertyManager allows you to compute the flux results on selected faces for Magnetostatic,
AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Compute flux PropertyManager after a
successful run of your study.

Display
1.
2.
3.

Click inside the Faces box


then select the face to which you want to compute the Flux.
Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree .Available only for AC Magnetic studies.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

4.
5.

Time
. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.
Click the Compute button to compute the flux on the selected face (s).

the results will be displayed in the edit box under the Compute button

The compute flux is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

220

Viewing Results

Compute Voltage
The Compute Voltage PropertyManager allows you to compute the voltage results on selected faces for AC
Magnetic studies. You can access the Compute voltage PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display
1.
2.
3.

Enter the coordinates of two points that define a line for which you want to compute voltage. You can click
on import button to load solidworks defined reference points.
Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree .Available only for AC Magnetic studies.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be computed.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

4.

Time

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

5.
6.

Select Units
. Select the units of the voltage.
Click the Compute button to compute the voltage on the selected two points that define a line.

the results will be displayed in the edit box under the Compute button

The compute voltage is available only for AC Magnetic analyses.

221

EMS User Guide

Thermal Plotting Results

Temperature
The Temperature Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot the temperature results for Electrostatic, Electric
Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Temperature Plot PropertyManager
after a successful run of your study with thermal solution options on. Since the temperature is a scalar, they are no
components to choose from nor is there a vector plot type. That is, the only fringe plot type is available.

Display

Select Units
. Select the units of the Temperature plot.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

o Time
. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The Temperature plot is available only for Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and
Transient Magnetic analyses.

222

Viewing Results

Temperature Gradient
The Temperature Gradient Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot the temperature gradient results for
Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Temperature
Gradient Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of your study with thermal solution options on.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an Temperature Gradient components to plot. Directions are based on
the global coordinate system.
o TGx: Temperature Gradient in the X direction
o TGy: Temperature Gradient in the Y direction
o TGz: Temperature Gradient in the Z direction
o TGr: Resultant Temperature Gradient

Select Units

Plot Type .
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all Temperature Gradient components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant Temperature Gradient vector. You can control the size and density
of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

. Select the units of the Temperature Gradient plot.

o Time
. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.
Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Lines. Uses colored line contours.
o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The Temperature Gradient plot is available only for Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and
Transient Magnetic analyses.

223

EMS User Guide

Heat Flux
The Heat Flux Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot the heat flux results for Electrostatic, Electric
Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Heat Flux Plot PropertyManager after
a successful run of your study with thermal solution options on.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an Heat Flux components to plot. Directions are based on the global
coordinate system.
o FLx: Heat Flux in the X direction
o FLy: Heat Flux in the Y direction
o FLz: Heat Flux in the Z direction
o FLr: Resultant Heat Flux

Select Units
. Select the units of the Heat Flux plot.
Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.
Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time

. Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Plot Type .
o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe
Options. Available for all Heat Flux components.
o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude
and direction of the resultant Heat Flux vector. You can control the size and density of the
vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.

o
o
o
o

Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.


Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
Lines. Uses colored line contours.
Points. Uses colored point contours.

The Heat Flux plot is available only for Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient
Magnetic analyses.

224

Viewing Results

Summary of Plots
EMS outputs different quantities depending on the analysis type. Some users may not identify which analysis that
should be used only after they know the type of results and plots. The table below gives a summary for available
plots available for each type of analysis.

ANALYSIS TYPE

AVAILABLE PLOTS

Electrostatic

Electric Potential
Electric Field
Electric Displacement
Force Density

Electric Conduction

Electric Potential
Electric Field
Current Density

Applied Current
Density
Magnetic Flux Density
Magnetic Field
Intensity
Force Density
Electric Field
Flux

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

Magnetic Flux Density


Magnetic Field
Intensity
Applied Current
Density
Current Density
Force Density
Electric Field
Losses Density
Flux
Voltage
Magnetic Flux Density
Magnetic Field
Intensity
Applied Current
Density
Current Density
Force Density
Flux

REMARKS

Only fringe plot is


available for electric
potential plot since it is a
scalar.
Applied current density
plot is available only if
the model has at least
one coil.
The Lorentz force type is
not available for
electrostatic analysis.
For transient magnetic
analysis, a time must be
chosen for each plot
type.
A wound coil does not
have any eddy current
despite its conductivity.
To have an eddy current,
a component must have
a nonzero conductivity.
Force plot is not
available for the electric
conduction analysis.
If thermal solution is
on Temperature,
Temperature Gradient
and Heat Flux plot will
be available where is
applicable.

225

EMS User Guide

Graphing Results
Graphing Results
EMS has two ways of producing 2D graphs of the results.

226

Graphing of Probed Results Plots


Graphing Results on a Line Segment

Viewing Results

Graphing of Probed Result Plots


After using the Probe tool to identify the plotted result at the desired locations, you can graph the results. You can
use this functionality with any plot.

To generate a graph for the probed result plot:


1.
2.

Plot the desired result.


In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon and select Probe.
The Probe dialog box opens.

3.

In the graphics area, click the desired locations.


The locations are highlighted in the graphics area as you click, and the nodes closest to these locations are
listed in the dialog box.

4.

Click Plot.

Below are some features of the Probing plot.

To see the listing of the force click on the Listing tab.


The distance D plotted on x-axis is from the starting of the segment.
To change the plot's properties, double click on the plot or click on the properties button
To turn the markers on, click on the marker button

To track the values on the curve, click on the drag button


and drag the pointer on the curve.
To save the plot click on File->Save As and choose the desired format.
To copy the plot make sure that the 2D Plot tab is active and click on Edit->Copy.
To export the data to a text file or an Excel sheet, activate the Listing tab and click on Edit->Copy.

227

EMS User Guide

Graphing Results on a Line Segment


Graphing probed results picks only mesh nodes. Graphing results on a line segment is more general because it
allows for precisely selecting any 2 points in the model that define a line. In addition, the line segment may be
discretized to any number of points between the endpoints of the line. This functionality may be used with any plot
type.
To generate a graph on a line segment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Insert two points using the SolidWorks command: Insert->Reference Geometry->Point.


Right-clicking a result folder in the EMS Manager tree and select 2D.
From the drop-down list, choose the component of the field.
Select the end points of the line segment.
Choose the number of points on the segment.
Compare with (optional): this feature enable you to compare your defined segment plot of the active
study with other studies from the same study type by selecting the extra curve study source. Maximum
number of extra curves to compare with is three.

7.

Click OK

Below are some features of the 2D plot.

228

To see the listing of the force click on the Listing tab.


The distance D plotted on x-axis is from the starting of the segment.
To change the plot's properties, double click on the plot or click on the properties button
To turn the markers on, click on the marker button

To track the values on the curve, click on the drag button


and drag the pointer on the curve.
To save the plot click on File->Save As and choose the desired format.
To copy the plot make sure that the 2D Plot tab is active and click on Edit->Copy.
To export the data to a text file or an Excel sheet, activate the Listing tab and click on Edit->Copy.

Viewing Results

Manipulating Result Plots


Processing Result Plots
In this section you learn how to process results plots including::

Editing an Active Plot


Changing the Chart Options of a Plot
Section Clipping
Iso Clipping
Animate plot
Probing a Plot
Spline Probing
Plot Listing
Printing a Plot
Saving a Plot
Renaming a Plot
Deleting a Plot
Copying a Plot

229

EMS User Guide

Editing a Result Plot


After generating a plot for the desired result, you may need to change one or more display options of the plot.
To edit an active plot:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon and select Edit Definition.
The PropertyManager of the plot appears.

2.

230

Make the desired changes and click OK

Viewing Results

Section
The Section PropertyManager allows you to create section views for the displayed result defining a cut. You may
view the inside or outside of the cut. You may define up to six sections on the same plot.
To define a section view for the active plot:
1.

Right-click the active plot icon and select Section Clipping.


The Section PropertyManager opens and the dialogues for Section 1 appear.

2.

3.

Reference Plane. Select the plane to be used as a reference for the clipping section 1. You may select
one of the following button options:
o Front plane section button
o Top plane section button
o Right plane section button
Distance. Sets the distance between the reference plane (origin of the model ) and the clipping section

( reference point). Reference Point is represented by a sphere and an arrow


the reference
point can be dragged by mouse to any position within the clipping section.
4. X-Orientation . Rotates the clipping section around the X-axis. Available when Front or Top Reference
Plane is selected.
5. Y-Orientation . Rotates the clipping section around the Y-axis. Available when Front or Right Reference
Plane is selected.
6. Z-Orientation . Rotates the clipping section around the Z-axis. Available when Top or Right Reference
Plane is selected.
7. Section Value Range: Set range of values of the section 1 to be created by setting the start range value
and the end range value. Note: The section range values must be within the plot color chart range values.
8. Plot on section only. Displays the result contours on the selected section only. Available only for
Section 1
9. Inside Out. if checked, shows the clipped data in the range of section value to the maximum plot value.
Available only for Section 1
10. If you wish to define more sections, repeat the steps 2..7 for each selected section ( up to a maximum
of 6 section).
11. Click OK

Options

Boundaries . Sets the display of the model boundary (None, Mesh or 3D Mesh)
Wireframe: Show/Hide model frame check box.
Model Origin: Show/Hide model origin check box.

Section Plane Center: Show/Hide section plane center


check box.
All section planes frame: Show/Hide All section planes frame check box.

Clipping on/off
. Sets the clipping of the active plot on/off.
Reset. Resets the selections to the default values.

231

EMS User Guide

Section 3
This section appears after you select Section 2. Use Section 2 and Section 3 to create additional section views in
the model.
NOTE: Section 3 is unavailable until Section 2 is selected.

232

Viewing Results

Iso Clipping
The Iso Clipping PropertyManager allows you to view surfaces of a specified value of the plotted result. You can
create up to six surfaces simultaneously.
To define an Iso clipping view for the active plot:
1.

Right-click the active plot icon and select Iso Clipping.


The Iso Clipping PropertyManager opens and the dialogues for Iso Clipping 1 appear.

2.
3.
4.
5.

2.

Iso Value. Sets the value of iso surface to be plotted.


Plot on section only. Displays the result contours on the selected section only. Available only for Iso 1
Inside Out. if checked, shows the clipped data in the range of section value to the maximum plot
value. Available only for Iso 1
If you wish to define more Iso Clipping, repeat the following steps for each selected Iso Clipping ( up to a
maximum of 6 Iso Clipping).
Iso Value. Sets the value of iso surface to be plotted.
Multilayers check box: Check this box if you wish to have spaced equally values between the
specified clipping Value Range.
o Iso Clipping Value Range: Set range of values of the Iso 2 to be created by setting the
start range value and the end range value. Note: The section range values must be
within the plot color chart range values.
o Number of Layers: Enter the number of layers

Click OK

Options

Boundaries . Sets the display of the model boundary (None, Mesh or 3D Mesh)
Wireframe: Show/Hide model frame check box.

Clipping on/off
. Sets the clipping of the active plot on/off.
Reset. Resets the selections to the default values.

Iso3
This Iso appears after you select Iso 2. Use Iso 2 and Iso 3 to create additional section views in the model.
NOTE: Section 3 is unavailable until Section 2 is selected.

233

EMS User Guide

Animate 3D Plots
The Animate PropertyManager allows you to animate the current active 3D plot. Animation will be available in the
following cases:
1- All analysis where the motion option is turned on. The animation will be a display of the active plot in each
motion time step.
2- In transient analysis. The animation will be a display of the active plot in each transient time step, if the motion
option is turned on the transient time step will be the motion time step.
3- AC Magnetic analysis. The animation will be base on a display of the active plot for each omegaT phase . if the
motion option is turned on, the animation will be a display of the active plot in each motion time step.

To Animate the active plot:


1.
2.
3.

234

Right-click the active plot icon and select Animate.


Click the play button to start animation with the default settings. You also have a pause and a stop button
to control the display of animation.
If you wish to save the animation in a video (*.avi) file, expand the Play to file... group and click the save
As button to save the animation with the defaults settings into a file. You may select the frame rate and
number of loops of the animation process.

Viewing Results

3D Plot Listing
In many cases, you may want to know the numerical values of the plotted field . The listing functionality lets you
view and export the plotted field values to an excel sheet or text file.
To view the plot listing:
1.
2.

In the EMS Manager tree, double-click the desired plot icon.


Right-click the plot icon and select Listing menu item. The listing PropertyManager opens.

3.

To export listing click on SaveAs button to save the listed values as an Microsoft Excel Sheet (*.xls) or
as a Text File (*.txt).

4.

Click OK

235

EMS User Guide

Chart Options
Use the Chart Options PropertyManager to set the parameters that control the look of the legend in the active plot.
To access the Chart Options PropertyManager, right-click the active plot icon and select Chart Options.

Display Options

Show min annotation. Turns the display of the annotation of the minimum value of the plot on/off.
Show max annotation. Turns the display of the annotation of the maximum value of the plot on/off.
Display plot details. If checked, displays the model name, study name, plot type, and the deformation
scale of a plot.
Show legend. Turns the display of the plot legend on/off.
Show Min/Max range on shown parts only. When checked, the program displays the minimum and the
maximum values of the plot only on the shown parts.

Automatic. If checked, picks the minimum (Min)


chart automatically.

Defined. If checked, you specify the minimum (Min)


of the chart.

and the maximum (Max)

values of the

and the maximum (Max)

values

Position/Format

Predefined positions. Sets the position of the chart to a predefined position.

Horizontal from left


. Specify the horizontal distance from the left of the SolidWorks window as a
percentage of the width of the window.

Vertical from top


. Specify the vertical distance from the top of the SolidWorks window as a
percentage of the height of the window.

Width

Number format
. Controls the display of the numeric values in the chart. Available formats are:
Scientific (e), floating (f), and general (g).

No. of decimal places


. Sets the number of decimal places to be displayed in the chart. You can
specify up to 8 decimal places to be displayed in a chart.

. Controls the thickness of the chart. Available options are: Thick, Normal, and Thin.

Color Options

236

Default

Rainbow

Gray Scale
white printers.

No. of chart colors


. Sets the number of the colors used in the chart (2 to 24).
Flip. Reverses the color mapping.

. Uses the default color map in the plot.


. Uses the rainbow color map in the plot.
. Sets the gray scale gradient map. Use this option for black and

Viewing Results

To apply a predefined color map...


1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the desired plot icon and select Chart Options.
The Chart Options PropertyManager appears.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Under Legend Options, click to check Display legend.


Under Chart Options, set the location of the legend and the numeric format.
Under Color Options, select Default, Rainbow, or Gray Scale.
If desired, click Flip to reverse the order of colors in the select color map.
Use the spin arrows to change the No. of Colors in the color map.

7.

Click OK

To plot a result on the shown parts only...


1.
2.
3.
4.

After running the study, display the desired result on the full model.
Hide the components that you want be hidden from the FeatureManager design tree.
Switch back to the EMS Manager tree and display the result again by double-clicking on the plot icon.
Right-click the plot icon and select Chart Options.
The Chart Options PropertyManager appears.

5.
6.

Click to check Show Min/Max range on shown parts only.


Click OK .

237

EMS User Guide

Printing Result Plots


To print a result plot:
1.
2.

In the EMS Manager, right-click the Plot you want to print and select Print.
Click OK to send the plot in the SolidWorks window directly to the printer.

1.

The plot in the SolidWorks window is scaled to the paper size and then sent to the printer. It is recommended
that you increase the size of the SolidWorks window to adjust the size of the chart labels/plot.

238

Viewing Results

Saving Result Plots


EMS allows you to save result plots in different formats.
To save an active plot:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the active plot icon and select Save As.
The Save As dialog box opens.

2.
3.
4.

Specify the destination of the plot file.


Specify a name for the plot file.
Select one of the following formats:

5.

Bitmap Files (*.bmp)


JPEG Files (*.jpg)
Image Files (*.gif)

Click Save.

To save all fringe plot in a study:


In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the study's icon and select Save all plots as JPEG files.
The files are saved in the folder specified in the Result Options for reports.

239

EMS User Guide

Renaming Plot
To rename a result plot:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon that you want to rename and select Rename.
Enter the new name

2.

Click Enter.

The selected plot is renamed.

240

Viewing Results

Deleting a Result Plot


To delete a result plot:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon that you want to delete and select Delete.
A confirmation message pops up.

2.

Click Yes.

The selected plot is deleted.

241

EMS User Guide

Copying a Result Plot Between Studies


EMS allows you to copy result plots between studies of the same type.
To copy a plot between to studies of the same type:
1.
2.
3.

In the EMS Manager tree, activate the plot that you want to copy by double-clicking on its icon in the
source study.
Right-click the plot icon and select Copy.
In the destination study, right-click the result folder of the same type and select Paste.

The icon of the new plot appears with the same name as the source plot with the Copy[1] prefix.

242

Viewing Results

Adding a Plot Title


You can add a title to a plot using the plot's PropertyManager.
To add a title to a plot:
1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon and select Edit Definition.
The plot PropertyManager appears.

2.
3.

Under Property, type the desired title in the appropriate box.


Click OK.

243

EMS User Guide

Annotating Extreme Values on a Plot


You can annotate locations of extreme values in result plots. The program shows the numerical values and creates
leaders to the corresponding locations automatically.
To show extreme value annotations on plots:

244

1.

Right-click the active plot icon and select Chart Options.

2.
3.
4.

Click the Plot tab.


Under Display Options, check the Show min annotation and Show max annotation check boxes.
Click OK.

Viewing Results

Customizing Plot Legend


The Plot tab in the Options dialog box enables you to set the chart relative position, width of color bar, number
format, number of decimals, and background color. The selected settings become the defaults for subsequent plots.
To customize the result legend:
1.

Click EMS, Options.


The Options dialog box appears.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click the Plot tab.


In the Font box, click Plot Title, Plot Subtitle, and Legend to select a font.
In the Legend box, select the desired; legend position, width, numeric format and background color.
Click OK.

The specified options are used, by default, for all subsequent plots.

245

EMS User Guide

Including User Information in a Plot


You can customize the printing of your plots to include your company logo and information. You can automatically
include logo and text information in printed plots and study reports.
To include your company logo in a plot by default:
1.

Click EMS, Options.


The Options dialog box appears.

2.
3.

4.

Click the Plot tab.


Under User Information, do the following:
a. In the Company name box, type the name of your company.
b. Click Browse and select your company logo file in BMP or JPEG formats then click Save.
c. In the Author Name box, type your name.
d. Check Include user information in the print.
e. Check Draw a frame around the plot during printing.
f. Check Include it in the report.
Click OK.

EMS includes the specified user information by default in study plots.

246

Viewing Results

Probing Results
Probing Results
In many cases, you may want to know the numerical value of the plotted field at a particular location. The following
two types of probing enable you to accomplish this task.

Point Probing
Spline Probing

247

EMS User Guide

Point Probing
The Point Probing functionality lets you display the numerical value of the plotted field at the closest node to the
point of clicking. For convenience, the probing dialog box lets you save the listed results to a file.
To point probe a result plot:
1.
2.

In the EMS Manager tree, double-click the desired plot icon.


Right-click the plot icon and select Probe.
-or
Click EMS, Post Processor, Probe.
-orClick the Probe tool

on the EMS toolbar.

The Probe list box appears.


3.

In the graphics area, click at the desired location.


The value at the selected location is listed in the dialog box.

4.

You can do the following:

5.

Click Plot to generate a 2-D graph of the result values at the locations you probed.
Click Save to save the listed values as an Microsoft Excel Sheet (*.xls) or as a Text File (*.txt).

Click Close.

You can use the Probe tool

to probe section plots. EMS uses linear interpolation to calculate the value.

To probe a section plot:


1.
2.

Create a section plot of the desired result on the undeformed shape of the model.
Right-click the plot icon and select Probe.

The Probe Section list box appears.


3.

In the graphics area, click the section plot at different locations.

Values of the plotted result at the selected locations are listed in the list box.
4.

248

Click Close.

Viewing Results

Spline Probing
The Spline Probing functionality lets you display the numerical value of the plotted field along the spline curve. The
Spline Probing is done on a section plot . For convenience, the Spline Probing page let's you save the listed results
to a file.
To spline probe a result plot:
1.
2.

In the EMS Manager tree, double-click the desired plot icon.


Right-click the plot icon and select Spline Probing...
The Spline Probing PropertyManager opens and the dialogues for Spline Options and Section 1 appears.

3.

Spline Options. Select the desired options.

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Spline on active section only: select this options to probe the plot on the active section area only.
Free spline: Select this options to move the spline along the full model.
Resolution points: Enter desired number of points to be generated on the spline.
Guiding points: Enter desired number of guiding points on spline.
Import: push this button to import all defined solidworks reference points to be used as guiding
points for the spline.
2D plot title: Enter the desired 2D spline plot title.
Click Update to update the spline with newly defined options .
Click Save dialog box opens.
a. Specify the destination of the plot file.
b. Specify a name for the plot file.
c. Select one of the following formats: Bitmap Files (*.bmp) , JPEG Files (*.jpg) or Image
Files (*.gif)
Click Export to save the 2D spline plot listed values as an Microsoft Excel Sheet (*.xls) or as a
Text File (*.txt).

4.

Define your section view.

5.

Click OK

249

EMS User Guide

Probe
The Probing function allows you to click on a location in a plot and view the values of relevant variables at the
node closest to that location. When you probe a result plot, the Probe dialog box lists, in addition to the
information mentioned earlier, the value of the plotted result at the node closest to the location you clicked.

250

Plot information. Displays plot information. This information includes study name, plot type, time step
number and the corresponding time for transient magnetic studies.
Clear. Clears the selected items from the list box.
Save. Opens the Save As dialog box to let you save the information in the list box to a text file (*.txt) or to
an Excel file (*.xls).
Plot. Generates a 2-D graph of the values listed in the dialog box. Linear variation is assumed between
listed values. The graph assumes equal distances between probed locations. Available only for result
plots.

Study Reports
Study Reports
The Report tool helps you document your studies quickly and systematically by generating Internet-ready reports.
The reports are structured to describe all aspects of the study.
Plots created in the EMS Manager tree can be included automatically in the report. A printer-friendly version of the
report can be generated automatically. Reports provide an excellent way to share study results with others online
or in printed format. You can modify the various sections of the report by inserting text or graphics.
To share a report, send all associated image files along with the html files. The receiver should place all files in the
same folder for viewing.
To start the Report wizard, right-click the Report folder of the study and select Define. Settings that you enter in
the Report wizard are used for the report only. For example if you change the Result file location in the Set File
section, the actual result location does not change.

251

EMS User Guide

Report
The Report Wizard guides you through the process of creating a report for your study.

To access the Report dialog box:


In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Report folder of the desired study and select Define.
- or Activate a study by clicking on its icon and click EMS, Report.
The Report dialog box appears.

252

Settings for. Lists the sections that you can include in the report:
To remove a section from the report, clear the associated check box.
To preview the contents of a section, click its name and preview the contents in the Preview
area.
Preview. Displays the contents of the highlighted section in the Settings for list box. You can edit the
contents in the preview area as desired.
Report File Name. Lets you specify a name for the report. The file is placed in the active report directory.
Report File Format. Lets you specify the type of report file to be generated . Available file types are :
o Html file
o Word document file
Report Background Color: Lets you specify the background color of the report file.
Print Version. Check this check box to show a printer-friendly version of the report.
Show Report inside SolidWorks. Check this box to open the report inside SolidWorks by adding a
report viewer tab next to our plot results tab .

Study Reports

Generating a Report
To set the report location:
1.

Right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Options.
The Options dialog box appears.

2.

Click Results.

3.

To change the report location specified in the Report directory, click Browse
location then click OK.

and select a new

To generate a study report:


1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Report folder of the desired study and select Define.
The Report dialog box appears.

2.
3.

Click the desired section for a preview of its contents. You can type in the desired information in the
preview area.
In the Report file name field, type in the desired name.
The default name is StudyName-mmm, where mmm is a counter to set the rank of the plot in the Report
folder. The first report will be labeled StudyName-1, the second StudyName-2 and so on.

4.
5.
6.

Under Report Format, choose between Html and MS Word options.


Check Show report on OK to open the report upon closing the Report wizard.
If you want to automatically save all plots created in the EMS Manager tree and include them in the
appropriate sections of the report, click to check Automatically update all plots in JPEG files. This
option is available on editing mode only.
All plots will be generated in the current view.

6.
7.

Check Print Version so that the report graphics are easily printed.
Click OK. depending on the report format a report viewing tab will be added to solidworks. User will be
able to browse the report within the same solidworks window enviromnent.

Cover Page
Introduction
Description
Model View
Conclusion

253

EMS User Guide

Setting the Cover Page


This section lets you include your companys logo in addition to the title, author name, company, and date.

To set the cover page of the report:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

254

Click the Cover Page section in the Setting For box.


Click Browse and select an image for your company's logo. Acceptable formats are: JPEG (*.jpg), GIF
(*.gif), and Bitmap (*. bmp).
Type the report title in the Title box.
Type the author's name of the report in the Author box.
Type the company's name in the Company box.
Enter the date of the report in the Date box.
Click OK.

Study Reports

Setting Introduction
In the Introduction section, you set an introduction to the report. There is no default for the Introduction section.

To write or modify the introduction:


1.
2.

Click Introduction in the Setting for list box.


Type the text for the introduction.

255

EMS User Guide

Setting Description
The Description section provides a description of your study.

To write a description of your study:


1.
2.

256

Click the Description section in the Setting for box.


Modify the text as desired using simple text editing rules (like Notepad).

Study Reports

Setting Model View


This section lets you include All 3D model views wished to be added to the report as a .JPEG file.

To set the Model View of the report:


1.
2.

3.

Click the Model View section in the Setting For box.


From Add View select one of the available Model Views , than Check Show Mesh box if you wish to
view the mesh inside the selected view than click the Add... button to add the view to your selected views
list.
o Current View
o Front View
o Back View
o Left View
o Right View
o Top View
o Bottom View
o Isometric View
o Trimetric View
o Dimetric View
Repeat the above step (2) to include more model views to your report.

To Remove an added view from the selected view list:


1.
2.

Select the view to be removed


Click the Delete button to remove the view from the list.

To change the sequence in witch the views will be shown in the report:
1.
2.

Select a view from the list


Click the Move Up or Move Down button to modify the order in witch the selected view will be placed
inside the report.

257

EMS User Guide

Setting Conclusion
The Conclusion section lets you write a conclusion for the study.

To write or modify the conclusion:


1.
2.
3.

258

Click the Conclusion section in the Setting for box for a preview of the current conclusion. If you have
not entered a conclusion before, the conclusion will be blank.
Write your conclusion or modify it using simple text editing rules (like Notepad).
Click OK.

EMS Options
System Options - General
You control the display of error and warning icons in the EMS Analysis Manager tree, the visibility of toolbars,
options for mesh and plot appearance, etc.
To set the General options:
1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or assembly icon at the top of the tree and select
Options.
The System Options - General dialog box appears.

2.

Select from the options described below.

Reset All returns the General options to the system defaults.

What's Wrong Messages


o

Show errors. Displays the error icon next to the feature that has the error in the EMS
AnalysisManager tree. Right-click on the item and select What's wrong? to display the error
message.
Show warnings. Displays the warning icon next to the item that issued the warning in the EMS
AnalysisManager tree. Right-click on the item and select What's wrong? to display the warning
message.

Mesh colors
Sets colors for plotting the mesh.

o
o

Boundary Color. Sets the color for plotting element edges.

Element face color. Sets the color for plotting the bottom faces of shell elements. To change a
color, select boundary or shell bottom face color, click Edit, then choose a color, and click OK.

Result plots

Dynamic plot update. When checked, plots are dynamically updated as the parameters that control
the plots appearance are modified. Turn the flag off to improve performance of viewing results for
large assemblies.

259

EMS User Guide

System Options - Default Library


Sets the default folders for material and function curves.

Material library. Sets the folders to be searched by default for material library files (*.emsmtr).
Function curve library. Sets the folders to be searched by default for function curve library files
(*.emscur).

To set the Default Library folders:


1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the assembly icon at the top of the tree and select Options.

2.
3.

Click System Options, Default Library.


To specify default folders for existing material or function curves do the following:
a. Click Add.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
b.
c.
d.

4.

260

Navigate to the folder where library files exist and click OK.
Click Move Up or Move Down to change the folder search order.
Click Delete to delete a folder. To undo deleting a folder, click Cancel.

Click OK.

EMS Options

Default Options (New Study) - Units


The Units in the default Options tab allows you to set the default unit system.

B-H Curve Data. Sets the default preferred units for the magnetic flux density and magnetic field pair when
specifying the B-H curve. You may override these units in the dialogue boxes in the Function Curves
dialogue box..
Permanent Magnet Data. Sets the default preferred units for the coercivity and remanence when
specifying a permanent magnet. You may override these units in the dialogue boxes.
Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results. Sets the default preferred units for the magnetic flux density
and magnetic field results. You may override these units in the view the results dialogue boxes..

To set Units options:


1.

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the part icon and select Options.
The Options dialog box appears.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Click Default Options, Units.


From the B-H Curve Data menu, select the desired unit for the magnetic flux density (B) and magnetic
field (H).
From the Permanent Magnet Data menu, select the desired unit for the coercivity (Hc) and remanence
(Br).
From the Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results menu, select the desired viewing units for the
magnetic the magnetic field (H) and magnetic flux density (B) results.
Click OK.

Setting the preferred any of the above units does not restrict you from entering data in other units, the dialog
boxes for each one of them let you override the default preferred units.

261

EMS User Guide

Symbol Settings-Default Options


Symbol quality
Specifies the quality of the load and restraint symbols.

o
o

Wireframe. Displays 3D symbols wireframe.


Shaded. Displays 3D shaded symbols.

Wireframe quality

Shaded quality

Preview all symbols by default. When checked all symbols such mesh control and loads are
automatically shown. However, the symbols can later be hidden/shown for each document .
The symbol settings have effect on all the following quantities:
Load/Restraint
Resistance Set
Coils
Force/Torque
Mesh Control

262

EMS Options

Default Options (New Study) - Load/Restraint


Sets the default size of symbols for analysis features and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size
Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size.

Symbol colors
Sets the default color of symbols for analysis features such as fixed voltage, normal flux, etc.
To set the default settings of symbols:
1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.
The Options dialog box opens.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Default Options (New Study), Load/Restraint.


To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or
drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease).
To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,
then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box.
Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:
1.

In the PropertyManager of an analysis feature, click Edit color under Symbol Settings.
The Color window opens.

2.
3.

Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window.
To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the
symbol.

4.

Click OK

263

EMS User Guide

Resistance Set - Default Options (New Study)


Sets the default size of symbols for a Resistance Set and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size
Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Resistance Set.

Symbol colors
Sets the default color of symbols for a Resistance Set.
To set the default settings of symbols for a Resistance Set.
1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.
The Options dialog box opens.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Default Options (New Study), Resistance Set.


To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or
drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease).
To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,
then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box.
Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:
1.

In the PropertyManager of a Resistance Set. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.
The Color window opens.

264

2.
3.

Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window.
To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the
symbol.

4.

Click OK

EMS Options

Coils - Default Options (New Study)


Sets the default size of symbols for a Coil and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size
Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Coil.

Symbol colors
Sets the default color of symbols for a Coil.
To set the default settings of symbols for a Coil.
1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.
The Options dialog box opens.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Default Options (New Study), Coil.


To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or
drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease).
To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,
then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box.
Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:
1.

In the PropertyManager of a Coil. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.


The Color window opens.

2.
3.

Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window.
To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the
symbol.

4.

Click OK

265

EMS User Guide

Force/Torque - Default Options (New Study)


Sets the default size of symbols for a Force/Torque set and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size
Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Force/Torque set .

Symbol colors
Sets the default color of symbols for a Force/Torque set .
To set the default settings of symbols for a Force/Torque set.
1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.
The Options dialog box opens.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Default Options (New Study), Force/Torque.


To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or
drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease).
To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,
then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box.
Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:
1.

In the PropertyManager of a Force/Torque set. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.
The Color window opens.

266

2.
3.

Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window.
To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the
symbol.

4.

Click OK

EMS Options

Mesh Control - Default Options (New Study)


Sets the default size of symbols for a Mesh Control set and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size
Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Mesh Control set .

Symbol colors
Sets the default color of symbols for a Mesh Control set .
To set the default settings of symbols for a Mesh Control set.
1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.
The Options dialog box opens.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Default Options (New Study), Mesh Control.


To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or
drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease).
To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,
then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box.
Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:
1.

In the PropertyManager of a Mesh Control set. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.
The Color window opens.

2.
3.

Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window.
To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the
symbol.

4.

Click OK

267

EMS User Guide

Mesh - Default Options (New Study)


You set your meshing options. The mesh that the software generates depends on the following factors:

Active meshing options for the study


Mesh control specifications
Element size and Tolerance (specified in the Mesh PropertyManager)

NOTES

The software continues to use the active meshing options set in the Mesh page of the Default Options
(New Study) tab until you change them. Any changes to these meshing options apply to new studies only.
You can modify the meshing options from one study to another.
Meshing options are essential factors in determining the quality of the results. Results based on different
option settings should converge to each other if a small-enough element size is used.

To access the mesh Options dialog box, right-click the Mesh icon in the EMS Analysis Manager tree,
select Create Mesh, and expand Options.

Element Growth Rate


The Element Growth Rate is the maximum ratio between two neighboring elements. The default value is 1.4 which
is adequate for most problems.

Accurate Curvature Representation


The Accurate Curvature Representation option, when checked, the mesher follows accurately curved
surfaces. The default value is 12 which the maximum angle between the normal to the surface and the normal to
the mesh faces.

Automatic Looping for solids


The Automatic Looping for solids option instructs the program to automatically retry to mesh the model using a
different global element size. You control the maximum number of trials allowed and the factors by which the global
element and tolerance are scaled for each loop.

268

No. of loops. Sets the maximum number of mesh trials.


Global element size factor for each loop. Factor by which the new global element size is
multiplied to calculate the new global element size.
Tolerance factor for each loop. Factor by which the new tolerance is multiplied to calculate the
new tolerance.

EMS Options

Default Options (New Study) - Results


You set the location for storing analysis information and data.

Results folder

SolidWorks document folder. Sets the results folder in the same directory of the model folder.
Under sub folder. Sets a sub-directory of the model folder as the destination folder of
the analysis results.
User defined. Specify the location of the results folder of new studies. To change the default
location, click

and select a different directory.

Report folder

Specify the location of the report of new studies. To change this default, click
and select a different
directory.
Results folder. If selected, the study report is saved in the same location with the results folder.
User defined. Specify the location of the report folder of new studies. To change the default location, click
and select a different directory.

To change the results location of an existing study...


1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the icon of the study for which you want to change the
results location and select Properties.
The property manager page opens.

2.

Under the Results folder, click on

and select a new destination folder.

To change the report location of an existing study...


1.

In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the report icon and select Define.
The Report dialog box appears.

2.
3.

Click
next to the Report path box and select the desired destination folder for the report.
Click OK.

269

EMS User Guide

Default Options (New Study) - Plot


Sets the options for result plots.

Annotation and range

Show minimum value annotation. If checked, the annotation for the minimum value of the plot is
displayed.
Show maximum value annotation. If checked, the annotation for the maximum value of the plot is
displayed.
Show range based on shown components only. If checked, the result range in the legend applies to
the shown part only and not to the whole model.

Settings options

Fringe options. Sets the display for the fringe plot.


o Point. Uses colored point contours.
o Line. Uses colored line contours.
o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading.
o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.
Boundary options

o
o
o

None. Sets the display of the model boundary off.


Mesh. Superimposes the selected result plot on the surface mesh plot.
3D Mesh. Superimposes the selected result plot on the 3D mesh plot.

Font
Set the font for Plot Title, Plot Subtitle, and the Color Chart.

270

EMS Options

Default Options (New Study) - Color Chart


Sets the parameters that control the look of the plot legend.

Display color charts. Turns the display of the plot legend on/off.
Display plot details. If checked, displays the model name, study name, plot type, and the deformation
scale of a plot.

Position

Predefined positions. Sets the position of the chart to a predefined position.


User defined. Sets the relative location of the upper left corner of the color bar.
o Horizontal from left. Specifies the horizontal distance from the left of the graphics area as a
percentage of the width of the window.
o Vertical from top. Specifies the vertical distance from the top of the graphics area as a
percentage of the height of the window.

Width

Controls the thickness of the chart. Available options are: Wide, Normal, and Thin.

Number format

There are 3 options to control the format of the legend values:


Scientific(e). Examples: 1.234e+01 for 12.34 and -1.234e-02 for -0.01234.
Floating(f). Regular decimal format.
General(g). Program may mix scientific and floating formats based on actual results.
No. of decimal places. Maximum allowable number of decimal places is 16.

Color options

Default

Rainbow

Gray Scale
. Sets the gray scale gradient map. Use this option for black and
white printers.
No. of chart colors. Sets the number of the colors used in the chart (2 to 24).
Flip. Reverses the color mapping.

. Uses the default color map in the plot.


. Uses the rainbow color map in the plot.

Any changes to the above settings take effect for new plots only. They do not affect existing plots.

271

EMS User Guide

Default Options (New Study) - User information


You enter your company information and author name.

272

Company name. Enter your company name.


Company logo. Browse in the appropriate folder to select your company logo image file (*.bmp or *.jpg).
Author name. Enter the name of the author.
Include user information in the print. Select this option to include user information in the plots print.
Include it in the report. Select this option to include user information in the study report.

Support and Service


How to Contact Us?
Any of the options below may be selected to contact ElectroMagneticWorks:

Mailing Address

World Wide Web

273

EMS User Guide

Mailing Address
ElectroMagneticWorks
8300, St-Patrick Street, Suite 300
Montreal, Quebec, H8N 2H1
Phone: (514) 634 9797
Toll-Free: 1 800 397 1557
Fax: (514) 613 0013
E-mail:
Technical support: :ems_support@emworks.com
Sales: sales@emworks.com

274

Support and Service

World Wide Web

Web Page: http://www.emworks.com

275

Index
0
01 for 12.34 and ..................................................... 279
02 for ...................................................................... 279
0oC .......................................................................... 72
1

8
8.854x10 .................................................................. 27
A
A 2D ......................................................... 17, 214, 216
A 3D ......................................................................... 89

1.234e .................................................................... 279

A Accurate Curvature Representation .................... 211

1e-03 ...................................................................... 127

A Band ..................................................................... 81

1e-05 ...................................................................... 127

A brushless .............................................................. 81

1e-12F............................................................ 176, 178

A brushless DC ........................................................ 81

A Cartesian ............................................................ 148

2D..................................................... 17, 214, 236, 257

A changing ............................................................. 199

2D Plots............................................................. 17, 216

A checkmark .......................................................... 144

A clipping ............................................................... 103

3.526x107 S/m at a frequency = .............................. 48

A Coil ..................................................................... 273

32oF ......................................................................... 72

A Coil and .............................................................. 273

3D..................................................... 17, 120, 216, 242

A Conductor ............................................................. 25

3D Mesh ................................................................. 278

A Contact Resistance............................................. 158

3D Mesh Pre ............................................................ 15

A counter to ............................................................ 261

3D Plot Listing ........................................................ 243

A df................................................................. 185, 188

3D Plots ................................................................. 216

A display ................................................................ 242

3D Plots Animation .................................................... 17

A Electric Conduction ............................................. 194

3D Plots Export .......................................................... 17

A enter a ................................................................ 152

5
500oC ...................................................................... 72

A face ....................................................................... 78
A fan......................................................................... 78
A floating .......................................................... 25, 157

277

EMS User Guide

A Force .................................................................. 274

A Resistance Set and............................................. 272

A Forcer ................................................................... 81

A set of ................................................................... 128

A function of ........................... 38, 40, 56, 58, 147, 171

A set of partial differential ......................................... 20

A Gold Certified ...........................................................7

A Solid.................................................... 175, 176, 178

A group of .............................................................. 113

A Study .................................................................. 131

A Hysteresis ................................................... 136, 140

A surrounding ........................................................... 79

A Line Segment...................................................... 236

A Text File .............................................. 243, 256, 257

A link ..........................................................................3

A Transient Magnetic ....................................... 62, 178

A list ......................................................................... 19

A Transient Magnetic Study ................................... 178

A Load.............................................................. 93, 110

A value ................................................... 164, 165, 166

A load or ................................................................. 155

A Wound ........................................ 170, 175, 176, 178

A Magnetic ....................................................... 97, 169

A/m......................................................... 136, 140, 143

A Magnetostatic ............................................... 43, 175

About Coils ............................................................. 169

A Material ............................................................... 147

About Forces and Torques ..................................... 185

A measure ...................................................... 193, 197

About Function Curves ........................................... 151

A measure of .................................................... 48, 136

About Maxwell's Equations ...................................... 20

A Mesh Control ...................................................... 275

About Permanent Magnets .................................... 140

A Motion Analysis..................................................... 80

About Resistance ................................................... 193

A Motor .................................................................... 81

About SolidWorks Motion ......................................... 80

A name ................................................................... 112

About Units ............................................................ 107

A NxN ............................................................. 197, 199

AC ........................................................ 12, 17, 46, 114

A Paraview ................................................................ 17

AC and Transient Magnetic .................................... 188

A part ..................................................................... 111

AC and Transient Magnetic Studies ....................... 170

A plot ...................................................... 143, 252, 254

AC Magnetic.. 48, 91, 93, 96, 110, 111, 119, 126, 135,
136, 138, 167, 171, 181, 192, 233, 242

A Prandtl Number..................................................... 79
AC Magnetic Analysis .............................................. 53
A receiving ............................................... 91, 119, 181
Performing ............................................................ 53
A Resistance Set.................................................... 272
278

Index

AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic ...................... 81

Air Modeling ........................................................... 100

AC Magnetic Options ............................................. 126

All 3D ..................................................................... 265

Accurate Curvature Representation ............... 205, 276

All Bodies ....................................................... 144, 147

AC-Magnetic Analysis ................................................ 12

All EMS .................................................................... 67

Activate SW............................................................ 130

All EMS toolbar ...................................................... 114

Add Parameter button ............................................ 214

All Heat Flux ........................................................... 232

Address .................................................................. 282

All Magnetic ........................................................... 174

Mailing ................................................................ 282

All returns the General ........................................... 267

Advanced 3D Spline Probing ....................................... 17

All rotating ................................................................ 81

After assigning ....................................................... 102

All studies ............................................................... 214

After assigning a .................................................... 144

All Temperature Gradient ....................................... 231

After building ............................................................ 90

AlNiCo .................................................................... 140

After finishing the ................................................... 206

Also assigns a Remanence ............................ 143, 147

After generating a................................................... 238

Also change the ..................................................... 131

After making ........................................................... 203

Also computed for ...................................................... 12

After meshing ................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 133, 206

Also continue to...................................................... 140

After meshing has .................................................. 210

Also determine the ........................................... 91, 119

After meshing the ................................................... 206

Also gives a .............................................................. 19

After rebuilding the ................................................. 203

Also mean a ........................................................... 169

After running a.................................... 68, 87, 213, 216

Also request to ................................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

After running a Magnetostatic ................................ 103

Also view the .......................................................... 213

After running the..................................... 103, 185, 244

Aluminum Oxide ....................................................... 72

After using the tool to ............................................. 235

Aluminum-Nickel-Cobalt ......................................... 140

After Werner ........................................................... 136

American ................................................ 175, 176, 178

Again, Transient Magnetic ............................... 91, 119

An AC Magnetic ............................................... 52, 176

Agnetic Field .......................................................... 223

An AC Magnetic Study ........................................... 176

Agnetic Flux Density .............................................. 222

An Add ..................................................................... 89
279

EMS User Guide

An Aluminum ............................................................ 48

And Bitmap ............................................................ 262

An browse .............................................................. 147

And Br .................................................................... 140

An electromagnetic .................................................. 67

And changes the .................................... 271, 274, 275

An Element Growth Rate ....................................... 211

And choose an ............................................... 148, 149

An equi ............................................................. 25, 157

And choose the ...................... 147, 148, 149, 235, 236

An Excel ......................................................... 235, 236

And choose the toolbar .......................................... 114

An Excel file ........................................................... 258

And color ................................ 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

An existing 27, 144, 146, 150, 151, 152, 153, 178, 202

And computes the ...................................... 25, 81, 157

An Existing Library ................................................. 146

And conducting ............................................ 42, 51, 61

An insulting ............................................................ 170

And Core ................................................................... 12

An intervening .......................................................... 66

And create the .......................................................... 95

An Microsoft Excel Sheet ....................... 243, 256, 257

And define a ..................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 148, 149

An orthotropic ......................................................... 149

And define the ........................................................ 185

An RLC ..................................................................... 12

And display the....................................................... 244

Analysis Background................................................ 19

And drag the .................................................. 235, 236

Analysis Results ..................................................... 213

And drop ................................................................ 112

Viewing ............................................................... 213

And Drop Rules ...................................................... 113

analysis steps........................................................... 95

And drop to ............................................................ 113

Analysis Type ......................................... 181, 192, 233

And electromechanical ..................................... 91, 119

analysis types................................................. 138, 167

And examine the .................................................... 100

AND ...........................................................................5

And Exit .................................................................. 181

And AC................................................................... 114

And Exit Ports ................................................ 171, 181

And AC Magnetics ................................................... 67

And Exit Ports are .................................................. 171

And accounts for ...................................................... 80

And export the ........................................................ 243

And affects the ....................................................... 199

And expressing the ............................................ 22, 30

And analyze the ....................................................... 80

And floating ............................................................ 279

And analyze the 3D .................................................. 15

And generate a......................................................... 99

280

Index

And high ................................................................... 21

And Thin ......................................................... 244, 279

And If...................................................................... 178

And Tolerance ................................................ 204, 276

And increases the .................................................... 78

And touches the ....................................................... 81

And increment the .................................................. 127

And Transient Magnetic ................... 96, 135, 136, 161

And investigate the................................................... 94

And view the........................................................... 258

And iso ................................................................... 103

And viewing during ................................................. 106

And Legend ............................................................ 253

And warning ........................................................... 267

And Magnetostatic ......................................... 102, 128

And Z ....................................................................... 68

And MEMS ....................................................... 91, 119

Animate .................................................................. 242

And meshing ................................................................ 7

Animate 3D Plots ................................................... 242

And meshing the .................................................... 102

Annotating .............................................................. 252

And neighboring ..................................................... 143

Extreme Values .................................................. 252

And number of........................................................ 242

Aopen ....................................................................... 17

And Plane1 ............................................................ 104

Applicable Boundary Conditions .................. 41, 50, 60

And Plane3 ............................................................ 104

Applicable Restraints ............................................... 33

And run the .............................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 102

Applied Current Density ............ 12, 45, 54, 64, 224, 233

And select a ................... 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 277

Applied Current Density Plot .................................. 224

And select an ......................................................... 262

Apply ...................................................................... 121

And select the ........................................................ 277

Apply Control.................................................. 207, 208

And selecting 3D .................................................... 216

Apply Material ................................................ 144, 147

And selecting Create .............................................. 202

Apply Mesh Control ................................ 114, 207, 208

And selecting Define .............................................. 103

Are allowed for AC Magnetic .................................... 46

And shaping ........................................................... 140

Are applied to ......................................................... 155

And Show............................................................... 252

Are assigned the ............................................ 155, 156

And solves ............................................................... 91

Are computed a ........................................................ 64

And specify the .......................................................... 12

Are computed for Core Loss ........................................ 17

And subfolders ................................................. 93, 110

Are defined for Magnetic ................................ 170, 174


281

EMS User Guide

Are lossless which.............................................. 22, 38

Automatic Looping ................................................. 204

Are modeling .......................................... 175, 176, 178

Automatic Looping for ............................................ 276

Are referred .............................................................. 98

Automatically .......................................................... 261

Are required for ........................................................ 98

Available ................................................ 223, 228, 229

Are used ................................................................. 259

Available Plots........................................................ 233

Are used to ............................................................... 98

Avi .......................................................................... 242

As floating .............................................................. 157

AWG ................................................................ 12, 181

As Flux is Normal for ................................................ 95

As function of ......................................................... 173

B 147

As guiding .............................................................. 257

B, Br ....................................................................... 140

As iron or .................................................................. 99

Back View .............................................................. 265

As JPEG ................................................................ 247

Background on Meshing ........................................ 201

As links .......................................................................2

Basic Concepts of Analysis ...................................... 91

As load or ............................................................... 111

Basic Motion....................................................... 80, 81

As NdFeB............................................................... 140

Be added ................................................................ 265

As representing ...................................................... 136

Be added to solidworks .......................................... 261

As specifying a ........................................................... 12

Be applied to ............................................................ 15

As Voltage .............................................................. 194

Be assigned ..................................... 40, 43, 49, 58, 62

Asbestos-cement ..................................................... 72

Be assigned a ............................................ 24, 96, 135

Assemblies ............................................................. 106

Be assigned an ........................................................ 32

Assembly toolbar...................................................... 81

Be chosen .............................................................. 233

Assigning ............................................................... 144

Be computed for ....................................................... 48

Materials ............................................................. 144

Be computed to ...................................................... 199

Assing .................................................................... 199

Be copied ............................................................... 150

At DC ............................................................... 91, 119

Be defined .................................................... 43, 52, 62

At least one .................................................. 44, 53, 63

Be discretized to..................................................... 236

Auto-apply Air........................................................... 15

Be exported................................................................ 17

282

Index

Be generated automatically .................................... 259

Brushless DC ........................................................... 81

Be Magnetassembly............................................... 105

Btu...................................................................... 70, 72

Be orthotropic for Electric Conduction .................... 149

Btu/s ......................................................................... 70

Be selected to ........................................................ 281

Bulk Temperature................................................... 167

Be specified ............................... 40, 43, 49, 52, 58, 62

Button to ................................................................. 265

Be used to .................................................................. 12

Bx ......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 222

Because electromagnetic ....................................... 100

By adding ....................................................................5

Because meshing is ................................................. 15

By Ampere's ........................................................... 199

Been enhanced ........................................................... 12

By calling ................................................................ 169

Been improved for ...................................................... 12

By checking Run .............................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Benefits of Analysis .................................................. 90

By checking the Run .............................................. 133

Between Html and MS Word .................................. 261

By clicking .............................................. 131, 216, 260

Between MKS and CGS ......................................... 107

By clicking EMS ............................. 155, 169, 185, 193

Between Motor and Force ........................................ 81

By clicking the Motion Study .................................... 81

Between studies ..................................................... 250

By combining the.................................................... 201

B-H Curve Data ...................................................... 269

By controlling the...................................................... 99

BHmax ................................................................... 140

By creating a Forces .............................................. 185

Bitmap Files ................................................... 247, 257

By creating a Resistance ....................................... 193

Bmp........................................................ 247, 257, 262

By default ............................................... 104, 192, 253

Bmp or ................................................................... 280

By default for .......................................................... 268

Boolean .......................................................................5

By default the ......................................................... 190

Bottom View ........................................................... 265

By defining a .......................................... 26, 42, 51, 61

Boundary Color ...................................................... 267

By EMS ...................................................... 91, 98, 119

Br ................. 45, 54, 64, 136, 140, 143, 147, 222, 269

By EMS as ............................................................. 147

Br and BHmax ........................................................ 140

By generating a 2D ................................................ 214

Browse and ............................................................ 261

By generating Internet ............................................ 259

Browse to ............................................................... 178

By increasing the.................................................... 136


283

EMS User Guide

By inserting ............................................................ 259

Can edit the ............................................................ 260

By introducing an ............................................... 22, 30

Can exclude a ........................................................ 106

By joining the.......................................................... 105

Can generate a ...................................................... 103

By measuring the ..................................................... 79

Can modify the ............................................... 259, 276

By performing ........................................................... 90

Can run the ............................................................ 102

By performing the ..................................................... 95

Can select the .......................................................... 81

By placing the......................................................... 199

Can solve the ......................................................... 206

By pushing the New ............................................... 151

Can specify a ......................................................... 201

By reducing the ........................................................ 90

Can sustain a ........................................................... 30

By reversing the ....................................................... 99

Can think of .............................................................. 98

By rotating the ................................................ 185, 188

Can view a ............................................................. 103

By saving ................................................................. 89

Can view the ...................................................... 68, 87

By selecting the ...................................................... 236

Cancel ............................................................ 145, 268

By setting the ................................................. 239, 241

Capacitance Matrix ................................................ 197

By simulating the ...................................................... 90

Computing .......................................................... 197

By suppressing....................................................... 106

Carbon Steel ............................................................ 72

By using a .............................................................. 101

Cartesian ................................................................ 148

Bz ......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 222

Cast........................................................................ 140

Celsius ................................................................... 167

C/m ................................................................ 159, 167

Charge Density .............................................. 159, 167

CAD ......................................................................... 91

Chart Options ................................................. 244, 252

Can add a .............................................................. 251

Check ..................................................................... 106

Can choose to ........................................................ 133

Check All / Uncheck All .......................................... 214

Can create a........................................................... 121

Check Draw a......................................................... 254

Can create the.......................................................... 81

Check Enable ......................................................... 204

Can customize the ................................................. 254

Check Print Version ............................................... 261

Can define an ......................................................... 136

Check Reverse....................................................... 165

284

Index

Check Show ........................................................... 261

Click Save .............................................. 152, 247, 257

Checkbox ................................................................. 67

Click Save to .......................................................... 256

Choose Material Browser ............... 145, 146, 148, 149

Click System Options ..................................... 145, 268

Circuit breakers ........................................................ 21

Click Tools ............................................................. 106

Circuit Parameters ................................................. 199

Click Update ........................................................... 257

Computing .......................................................... 199

Click View .............................................................. 152

Click Add .................................................. 94, 145, 268

Click Yes ................................................................ 249

Click Browse .......................................................... 262

Clipping .................................................................. 241

Click Browse and ........................................... 147, 254

Value Range ....................................................... 241

Click Close ............................................................. 256

Coil ................. 169, 171, 174, 175, 176, 178, 180, 273

Click Default Options...... 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Coil DC Resistance ..................................................... 12

Click Delete to ................................................ 145, 268

Coil Entities ............................................................ 181

Click EMS .............................................. 253, 254, 256

Coil Excitation ........................................................... 12

Click Export to ........................................................ 257

Coil Excitation and Coupling to External Circuits .......... 12

Click Help ...................................................................5

Coil Excitation and Normal Flux Boundary Condition .... 12

Click Introduction.................................................... 263

Coil Excitation Functions ............................................ 12

Click Move Up or Move Down ........................ 145, 268

Coil General Properties .......................... 175, 176, 178

Click New Motion Study ........................................... 81

Coil Modeling ............................................................ 12

Click OK 112, 121, 132, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 153,
156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165,
166, 175, 176, 178, 180, 190, 191, 194, 195, 204,
206, 207, 208, 236, 239, 241, 243, 244, 246, 251,
252, 253, 254, 257, 261, 262, 266, 268, 269, 271,
272, 273, 274, 275, 277

Coil Properties........................................................ 171

Click OK to ............................. 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Coils or Electromagnets ........................................... 99

Click on Create/Edit Material .. 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

Color Chart ............................................................. 279

Click Open to.......................................... 151, 152, 153

Color Options ......................................................... 244

Click Options .......................................................... 204

Comes.................................................... 107, 144, 185

Click Plot ........................................................ 235, 256

Common Input........................................................ 181

Click Results .......................................................... 261

Compare Studies Results ...................................... 214

Coil to Magnetostatic study .................................... 175


Coil Type ................................................................ 181

285

EMS User Guide

Compute Capacitance.......................................... 12, 123

Cotton Wool ............................................................. 72

Compute Circuit Parameters ........................................ 12

Cover Page ............................................................ 262

Compute Flux ......................................................... 228

CPU ....................................................................... 199

Compute Voltage ................................................... 229

Create ............................................................ 204, 206

Computed based ......................................................... 12

Create Curve .................................................. 152, 178

Computing ...................................................... 197, 199

Create Curve to ...................................................... 147

Capacitance Matrix ............................................. 197

Create Mesh........................................................... 276

Circuit Parameters .............................................. 199

Current ........................................................... 171, 194

Concept of Design Studies ..................................... 118

Current Density .......................... 54, 64, 221, 225, 233

Conclusion ............................................................. 266

Current Density Plot ....................................... 221, 225

Setting ................................................................ 266

Current Driven ........................................................ 181

Conduction ............................................................... 70

Current Driven Coil................................. 175, 176, 178

Conductor .............................................. 114, 157, 167

Current Magnitude ................................................. 181

Floating ............................................... 114, 157, 167

Current View .......................................................... 265

Conductor Number ................................................. 167

Current-Time .......................................................... 151

Consequently ........................................................... 30

Current-Time Curve ............................................... 173

Contact Resistance ................................ 114, 158, 167

Curve ............................................................. 147, 178

Convection ....................................................... 78, 164

Curve and .............................................. 147, 152, 178

Convection Coefficient ........................................... 167

Curve Data ............................................................. 269

Convection Heat Coefficient ..................................... 79

Curve Library.................................................. 151, 153

Coordinate System to................................... 44, 53, 63

Curve Library or ..................................................... 152

Coordinate Systems ............. 28, 36, 98, 104, 148, 149

Curve of ................................................................. 143

Copy............................................... 112, 235, 236, 250

Curve that .............................................................. 143

Core Loss .................................................... 12, 54, 227

Customizing ........................................................... 253

Corian ...................................................................... 72

Plot Legend ........................................................ 253

Cork, regranulated ................................................... 72

Cylindrical .............................................................. 148

Cotree ....................................................................... 12
286

Index

Display ................................................................... 244

DC .................................................... 12, 21, 38, 81, 89

Display Options ...................................................... 244

DC Current Source................................................. 178

Displays 3D ............................................................ 270

DC Magnetic Field.................................................... 38

DOFs ........................................................................ 91

DC Voltage ............................................................. 178

Dr ..................................................................... 29, 220

Default.................................................... 145, 244, 268

Drag and Drop Functionality .................................. 113

Default Library ........................................................ 268

Dt ........................................................................... 199

Default Options ..... 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275,
276, 277, 278, 279, 280

DT/dx ....................................................................... 70
DT/dy ....................................................................... 79

Define...... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 103, 138, 194, 259, 260,
261, 277

During meshing ...................................................... 210

Orthotropic Properties ........................................ 138

During printing ........................................................ 254

Define Function Curves.................................. 152, 153

Dy..................................................................... 29, 220

Define Study Name ................................................ 112

Dz..................................................................... 29, 220

Delete............................................. 121, 132, 152, 249

Demagnetization Curve.......................................... 143

Each coil the........................................................... 171

Depending on the ..................................................... 91

Each conducting................................................. 49, 58

Described by a ......................................................... 91

Each floating ...................................................... 12, 197

Description ............................................................. 264

Each increment ...................................................... 125

Setting ................................................................ 264

Each load or ........................................................... 155

Design Studies ................................................. 94, 117

Each omegaT ......................................................... 242

Details ............................................................ 121, 202

Each study a .......................................................... 105

Diameter specification................................................. 12

Eddy ................................................................. 12, 170

Dimetric View ......................................................... 265

Eddy Current Density ............................................. 225

Direction of Coercivity ............................................ 148

Eddy Currents ........................................................ 170

Direction of Coercivity to .................................... 44, 63

Eddy Loss ........................................................ 54, 227

Directions ................................................................. 98

Edit ................................. 267, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Specifying ............................................................. 98

Edit Definition ................. 162, 180, 191, 195, 238, 251


287

EMS User Guide

Edit Material ..................................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Element Growth Rate ..................................... 205, 276

Editing a Curve Library........................................... 152

Element Types ....................................................... 120

Electric ................................................................... 124

Embedded HTML and Word Doc Viewer ..................... 17

Electric Charge....................................................... 114

EMS. 7, 12, 15, 67, 80, 81, 89, 91, 93, 94, 97, 99, 101,
102, 103, 105, 107, 110, 111, 113, 114, 119, 128,
133, 143, 144, 147, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160,
161, 163, 164, 165, 166, 169, 175, 176, 178, 185,
188, 190, 192, 193, 194, 199, 201, 206, 210, 211,
216, 225, 226, 233, 247, 250, 254, 260

Electric Conduction . 30, 36, 67, 91, 93, 102, 110, 111,
119, 124, 128, 138, 167, 192, 233
Electric Conduction Analyses ...................................... 12
Electric Conduction Analysis .................................... 36
Performing ............................................................ 36
Electric Conduction Assumption............................... 30
Electric Conduction Options ................................... 124
Electric Conductivity ............................. 40, 49, 58, 136
Electric Current Density ........................................... 37
Electric Displacement............................... 29, 220, 233
Electric Displacement Plot ..................................... 220
Electric Field........................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219, 233
Electric Field Plot ................................................... 219
Electric Potential .................................................... 233
Electric Potential Plot ............................................. 218
Electromagnetic20, 66, 67, 81, 87, 100, 107, 185, 188,
199
ElectroMagneticWorks ................................... 281, 282
Electromechanical ............................................ 91, 119
Electrostatic ............................................... 28, 81, 123
Electrostatic Analysis ............................................... 28
Performing ............................................................ 28
Electrostatic Assumption .......................................... 22
Electrostatic Options .............................................. 123
288

EMS 2012 .............................................................. 2, 7


EMS also ................................................................ 185
EMS Feature .............................................................. 9
EMS file .................................................................. 105
EMS Fundamentals.................................................. 89
EMS has ........................................................ 216, 234
EMS Help Topics ......................................................... 5
EMS Interface Components ................................... 109
EMS is ........................................................ 12, 89, 108
EMS Manager ........................................................ 132
EMS Manager Tree .......................................... 93, 110
EMS Manager Tree Conventions ........................... 111
EMS Matrix Solvers ................................................ 128
EMS Motion ............................................................. 81
EMS Reference ............................................................ 1
EMS that enable user to view EMS ............................ 9
EMS Toolbars ........................................................ 114
EMS uses ............................................................... 256
EMS uses Vector Finite Element which ................. 120
EMS2012 ....................................................................1
Emscur ........................................................... 147, 268

Index

Emsmtr ........................................................... 145, 268

Fixed Voltage ......................................... 114, 156, 167

EMViewer License .....................................................9

Flip ......................................................................... 244

End Time ................................................................ 127

Floating .................................................. 114, 157, 167

Energy Prod ........................................................... 140

Conductor ........................................... 114, 157, 167

English ........................................................... 108, 167

Floating Conductor ................................................. 157

Entry Port ....................................... 175, 176, 178, 194

FLr.................................................................... 68, 232

Er ................................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

FLx ................................................................... 68, 232

Excess ....................................................................... 12

FLy ................................................................... 68, 232

Excess Loss ................................................. 17, 54, 227

FLz ................................................................... 68, 232

Exit Port ......................................... 175, 176, 178, 194

FM ............................................................................ 12

Exponential Current Source ................................... 178

Foam Glass .............................................................. 72

Exponential Voltage ............................................... 178

For AC ............................................................ 185, 188

Extra Required Input .............................................. 181

For AC and Transient Magnetic ............. 102, 128, 170

Extreme Values ...................................................... 252

For AC Magnetic .................... 185, 188, 223, 228, 229

Annotating .......................................................... 252

For analyzing............................................ 91, 101, 201

Ey ................................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

For carrying ............................................................ 140

Ez ................................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

For choosing a ....................................................... 190

For conducting ......................................................... 22

F/m ................................................................... 27, 136

For creating .............................................................. 80

Fahrenheit .............................................................. 167

For Direct ............................................... 123, 124, 125

Failed Components ................................................ 210

For Electric ............................................................. 149

Failed Faces........................................................... 210

For Electric Conduction .......................... 124, 185, 193

Failure Diagnostics................................................. 210

For Electrical ............................................................ 97

FEA .......................................................... 91, 101, 201

For electromagnetic and electromechanical ............. 89

FEM ........................................................... 89, 91, 201

For Electrostatic ............................................. 102, 128

FEM is ...................................................................... 91

For existing ............................................................ 268

Finite Element Analysis ............................ 91, 101, 201

For finding ...................................................... 185, 188


289

EMS User Guide

For Force ................................................................. 81

Fr 29, 45, 54, 64, 226

For Iso 1 ................................................................. 241

Free Space Permeability ........................................ 136

For Iso Clipping 1 ................................................... 241

Free Space Permittivity .......................................... 136

For Magnetic ............................................ 97, 149, 171

Fringe Options218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225,


226, 227, 230, 231, 232

For Magnetostatic .......................................... 170, 188


From Add View....................................................... 265
For orthotropic .......................................................... 98
From Analysis ............................................................ 12
For Plot Title ........................................................... 278
From entering ......................................................... 269
For plotting ............................................................. 267
From SolidWorks Premium ...................................... 80
For plotting the ....................................................... 267
From Strontium or Barium Ferrite........................... 140
For Section 1 .......................................................... 239
From zero ............................................................... 199
For Spline Options and Section 1........................... 257
Front View .............................................................. 265
For storing .............................................................. 277
Ft hr.......................................................................... 70
For Transient Magnetic .................................... 91, 119
Ft hr oF .................................................................... 72
For viewing ............................................................. 259
Full license .................................................................9
For Windows ............................................................. 17
Fx ................................................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226
Force Computation Methods .................................. 188
Fy ................................................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226
Force Density ......................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226, 233
Fz ................................................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226
Force Density Plot .................................................. 226
G
Force Distribution ........................................... 185, 226
General .................................................................. 267
Force Type ............................................................. 226
Generating ............................................................. 103
Force/Torque.......................................................... 274
Reports ............................................................... 103
Force-based ............................................................. 81
Geometrical Entity .................................................. 167
Forced Convection ................................................... 78
Gif .......................................................... 247, 257, 262
Forces .................................................... 185, 190, 191
Glass, Pearls ............................................................ 72
Forces and Torques ............................... 26, 42, 51, 61
Global..................................................................... 204
Forms ............................................... 78, 171, 174, 188
Global Size ............................................................. 206
Fourier's ................................................................... 70
290

Index

Graphing ........................................................ 234, 236

How to Contact Us ................................................. 281

Results ....................................................... 234, 236

Hr ................................................... 45, 54, 64, 70, 223

Gray Scale ..................................................... 244, 279

Hr moC..................................................................... 72

Html................................................................ 114, 260

H Curve .................................................................. 147

Hx......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 223

H Curve of a Material ............................................. 143

Hy......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 223

H/m ........................................................................ 136

Hysteresis .................................................................. 12

H8N 2H1 ................................................................ 282

Hysteresis and Excess ......................................... 12, 126

Hairfelt...................................................................... 72

Hysteresis Loss .................................................... 17, 54

Have assigned ................................................... 44, 63

Hysterisis Loss ....................................................... 227

Have assigned an ............................ 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Hz................................................... 45, 48, 54, 64, 223

Have assigned the ................................................. 133

Have decayed to .................................................... 100

Ibrary .............................................................. 145, 268

Have defined a ....................................................... 113

Ij 197, 199

Have specified the.................................................. 133

Image Files ............................................................ 247

Having 7, 12, 15, 19, 22, 24, 28, 30, 36, 40, 41, 44, 46,
48, 50, 53, 54, 60, 63, 67, 70, 98, 100, 104, 107,
112, 113, 133, 138, 140, 143, 145, 147, 171, 181,
199, 214, 216, 224, 233, 241, 242, 266, 270

Import and .............................................................. 152

Hc........................................... 136, 140, 143, 147, 269


Hc and.................................................................... 140
He Model ................................................................ 216
Heat Flux .................................. 68, 114, 165, 167, 232
Heat Fluxin the ......................................................... 68
Help ............................................................................5
High and Very High .................................................... 12
High Precision or Very High Precision ................... 123
Hmax...................................................................... 143

Imported Current .................................................... 178


Imported Voltage .................................................... 178
Improved Meshing.................................................... 15
In 3D ...................................................................... 216
In AC ........................................................................ 12
In Amp.................................................... 175, 176, 181
In Amperes ............................................. 136, 140, 143
In Analysis................................................................. 12
In balance .............................................................. 199
In BMP or JPEG ..................................................... 254
In calculating ............................................................ 80
291

EMS User Guide

In case ............................................. 81, 175, 176, 178

In EMS the ....................................................... 81, 193

In case of ......................................................... 68, 185

In Exit Port ............................................................. 175

In case of Imported Current ................................... 178

In Gauss and .............................................. 40, 58, 147

In case of Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic ............ 219

In Gauss for Gaussian ........................................... 140

In case of Motion .............................. 37, 45, 54, 64, 68

In Gauss in Gaussian ..................................... 136, 143

In case of Solid Coil ............................................... 175

In generating an ..................................................... 211

In case of Solid Coil and ........................................ 176

In Hz................................................................. 48, 126

In case of Solid or Wound .............................. 176, 178

In identifying ..................................................... 91, 119

In case of Wound ................................................... 178

In JPEG.................................................................. 261

In case of Wound Coil .................................... 175, 176

In Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic .............. 136

In CGS ................................................................... 107

In Maxwell's .............................................................. 20

In coils for transient magnetic ................................ 151

In Meshing ............................................................... 15

In computing the............................................... 91, 119

In mind the ............................................................... 22

In conducting ................................................ 22, 54, 64

In MKS ............................... 40, 58, 136, 140, 143, 147

In CosmosEMS .............................................. 185, 188

In Motor .................................................................... 81

In Coulombs ........................................... 136, 159, 160

In Newtons ............................................................. 192

In creating ................................................................ 15

In Oersted .................................................. 40, 58, 147

In defining it ............................................................ 121

In Oersted in Gaussian .......................... 136, 140, 143

In determining the ............................ 91, 119, 205, 276

In Ohms ................................................. 158, 176, 178

In diagnosing .......................................................... 106

In order to .......................................... 12, 100, 138, 216

In Electric Conduction ............................................ 136

In pF ............................................................... 176, 178

In electromagnetic .............................................. 21, 46

In Result Viewing ....................................................... 17

In electromagnetism ............................................... 136

In searching ............................................................. 89

In EMS12, 19, 24, 66, 96, 99, 104, 135, 138, 140, 171,
174, 188, 197, 199

In SolidWorks ............................................. 81, 90, 107


In SolidWorks Motion ............................................... 80

In EMS 2012 ............................................................ 15


In SolidWorks or CosmosWorks....................... 96, 135
In EMS all ................................................................. 66
In SolidWorks Premium............................................ 80
292

Index

In Tesla for MKS .................................................... 140

Into SolidWorks ........................................................ 81

In Tesla in MKS .............................................. 136, 143

Introduction ............................................................ 263

In the second.......................................................... 147

Setting ................................................................ 263

In transferring ......................................................... 136

IPS ......................................................................... 167

In transmitting................................................... 91, 119

Is added ................................................................. 145

In uncovering the.................................................... 216

Is applied by the ..................................................... 185

In User Interface.........................................................9

Is assigned ............................................................. 111

In viewing the ......................................................... 213

Is called an ............................................................. 136

Include AWG ............................................................. 12

Is called the .............................................................. 79

Included . 1, 2, 5, 12, 15, 17, 21, 22, 26, 30, 38, 42, 46,
51, 56, 61, 80, 81, 89, 90, 100, 103, 113, 123, 124,
125, 126, 127, 136, 144, 151, 185, 188, 192, 237,
254, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 265, 280

Is Cartesian ............................................................ 148

Includes probing ....................................................... 15


Includes the .............................................................. 21
Including User Information ..................................... 254
Index ...........................................................................5
Input ............................................................... 133, 181
Insert .............................................................. 148, 149
Insert->Reference Geometry.................................. 236
Inserting a Materials Library ................................... 145
Inside Out ....................................................... 239, 241
Insulation .................................................................. 72
Interference Detection ............................................ 211
Interference Detection to ........................................ 106
Internally, EMS ....................................................... 197
Internet ................................................................... 103
Into account to........................................ 26, 42, 51, 61

Is completed ........................................................... 111


Is computed ............................................. 25, 157, 185
Is coupled ................................................................. 67
Is coupled to Electrostatics ...................................... 67
Is Direction 1 of Plane 1 ......................................... 104
Is Direction 2 of Plane 1 ......................................... 104
Is displaced a ................................................. 185, 188
Is EMS ..................................................................... 89
Is emscur ............................................... 152, 153, 178
Is function ................................................... 40, 58, 147
Is left to .................................................................... 78
Is linked to .............................................................. 199
Is Magnet ............................................................... 105
Is MKS ................................... 145, 146, 147, 148, 149
Is multiplied to ........................................................ 276
Is needed for Electrostatic ................................ 96, 135
Is Normal ................................................................ 114
293

EMS User Guide

Is obtained ....................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 64

It corresponds ........................................................ 133

Is orthotropic .......................................................... 138

It describes the ....................................................... 143

Is provided for ........................................................ 103

It encloses the .......................................................... 81

Is provided to.......................................................... 210

It exhibits a ............................................................. 140

Is requested ..................................................... 25, 157

It gives an ................................................................. 48

Is required for Magnetostatic ............................ 96, 135

It provides an............................................................ 89

Is said..................................................................... 199

It relates the ........................................................... 136

Is Skin Depth ............................................................ 48

It tends to ................................................................. 81

Is Study1 ................................................................ 105

Items in the Loads/Restraint Folder ....................... 113

Is StudyName......................................................... 261

Its MKS .................................................................. 136

Is surrounding the .................................................. 100

Is taken .................................................................... 79

Ja ........................................................................... 224

Is Tangential........................................................... 114

Jax ....................................................... 45, 54, 64, 224

Is tied ....................................................................... 79

Jaz ....................................................... 45, 54, 64, 224

Is used to ................................................. 78, 185, 188

Je ........................................................................... 225

Is varying ................................................................ 170

Jer .............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Iso .................................................................... 15, 103

Jex ............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Iso 2 ....................................................................... 241

Jey ............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Iso Clipping ............................................................ 241

Jez ............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Iso Clipping Value Range ....................................... 241

Joule ........................................................................ 66

Iso Value ................................................................ 241

JPEG...................................................................... 262

Iso3 ........................................................................ 241

JPEG Files ............................................. 247, 257, 265

Isometric View ........................................................ 265

Jpg ................................................. 247, 257, 262, 280

Isotropic Materials .................................................. 138

Jr 37, 221

It allows for ............................................................. 236

Jx ..................................................................... 37, 221

It becomes a........................................................... 114

Jy ..................................................................... 37, 221

It converges or ....................................................... 127

Jz ..................................................................... 37, 221

294

Index

Loss Input .................................................................. 12

Kcal .................................................................... 70, 72

Losses Density ................................................. 54, 233

Kelvin ..................................................................... 136

Losses Density Plot................................................ 227

L
Languages ............................................................. 108

Lossless Assumption ......................................... 22, 38


M

Layers .................................................................... 241

M0 ............................................................................ 48

Lead Pb .................................................................... 72

Made up ......................................................... 171, 192

Left View ................................................................ 265

Magnetic ................................................................... 12

LI 199

Magnetic Field ...................................... 45, 54, 64, 223

Linear Isotropic..................................... 40, 49, 58, 138

Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results ............... 269

Linear Materials...................................................... 138

Magnetic Field Intensity ......................................... 233

Linear Orthotropic .................... 40, 43, 49, 58, 62, 138

Magnetic Field Plot................................................. 223

Linearity Assumption .................................... 22, 30, 46

Magnetic Flux Density .......................... 45, 54, 64, 233

List of thermal conductivity values of different


materials ............................................................... 72

Magnetic Flux Density Plot ..................................... 222


Magnetostatic ........................................... 67, 125, 127

Listing............................................................. 235, 236


Magnetostatic Analysis ......................................... 12, 44
Listing menu item ................................................... 243
Performing ............................................................ 44
Load/Restraint ................................................ 167, 271
Magnetostatic Options ........................................... 125
Load/Restraint Folder............................................. 113
Magnetostatic Study............................................... 170
Loads .... 113, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162,
163, 164, 165, 166

Magnetostatic, AC and Transient Magnetic ........... 171

Modifying ............................................................ 162

Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic .................................. 161

Loads and Restraints ............................................. 155

Mailing .................................................................... 282

Loads/Restraint ...................................................... 113

Address .............................................................. 282

Loads/Restraints .............................. 27, 35, 43, 52, 62

Match ..........................................................................5

Local Coordinate Systems ..................................... 104

material .................................................................. 144

Lorentz ........................................................... 114, 226

Assigning ............................................................ 144

Lorentz Force ......................................................... 192

Material Library ........................................................ 15


295

EMS User Guide

Material Models ...................................................... 138

MGOe .................................................................... 140

Material Properties ............. 24, 32, 40, 49, 58, 96, 135

Min ......................................................................... 244

Material Properties Used in EMS ........................... 136

MK...................................................................... 70, 72

Materials ................................................................ 146

MoC ......................................................................... 72

Max ........................................................................ 244

Model Origin ........................................................... 239

Maxwell's................................................ 20, 38, 46, 56

Model View ............................................................ 265

May couple to SolidWorks Motion Magnetostatic ..... 81

Setting ................................................................ 265

May determine the ........................................... 91, 119

Modifying ................................................................ 162

May extend ............................................................ 143

Loads .................................................................. 162

May lead .................................................... 48, 91, 119

Monel ....................................................................... 72

May need to ..................................................... 67, 238

Montreal ................................................................. 282

May select the ........................................................ 242

More 3D .................................................................... 17

May view the .......................................................... 239

More 3D and .............................................................. 17

May want to .................................................... 243, 255

More Iso Clipping ................................................... 241

mesh .............................................................. 202, 276

More parts ................................................................ 80

Parameters ......................................................... 202

More studies........................................................... 214

Mesh Control .......................................................... 275

Most electromechanical ................................... 91, 119

Mesh Control Examples ......................................... 209

Motion Analysis ..... 12, 80, 81, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127

Mesh Control Parameters .............................. 207, 208

Performing ............................................................ 81

Mesh icon ............................................................... 202

Motion Analysis uses computationally...................... 80

Mesh Parameters ................................................... 206

Motion Type ............................................................. 81

Mesher in EMS....................................................... 201

Multilayers .............................................................. 241

Mesher to ............................................................... 205

Multiple Studies ...................................................... 129

Mesher's................................................................... 15

Multiply Connected Conductor Regions ........................ 12

Meshing ......................................... 203, 205, 206, 211

Must use AC Magnetic ............................................. 48

Options ............................................................... 205


Tips ..................................................................... 211
296

N
N*Current/PerTurn ................................................. 170

Index

N/A ......................................................................... 167

Non Linear Isotropic ............................................... 147

N3430 .................................................................... 140

None, Mesh or 3D Mesh ................................ 239, 241

N3625 .................................................................... 140

Nonlinear Isotropic ..................................... 40, 58, 138

N4221 .................................................................... 140

Nonlinear Materials .......................................... 49, 138

N4816 .................................................................... 140

Nonlinear orthotropic .................................. 40, 58, 138

N5214 .................................................................... 140

Non-linear Transient Solver ......................................... 12

N5513 .................................................................... 140

Normal ................................................................ 12, 97

NdFeB .................................................................... 140

Normal Flux .................................................... 161, 167

NEAR .........................................................................5

Normal Flux Boundary Condition ................................ 12

Neodymium-Iron-Boron .......................................... 140

Normal Precision .................................................... 123

Net Current ............................................................ 171

NOT............................................................................5

Nevertheless, remeshing the ................................. 155

Not allowed .............................................................. 49

new ........................................................................ 152

Not allowed for AC Magnetic .................................... 46

New 2D ..................................................................... 17

Not continue to ....................................................... 140

New Computed Parameters .......................................... 12

Not converge .......................................................... 127

New in Meshing & Pre.............................................. 15

Not entered a ......................................................... 266

New Material Library .............................................. 145

Not need to ........................................................ 24, 32

New Motion Study .................................................... 81

Not remesh ............................................................ 106

New Results ............................................................... 17

Not requested................................................... 25, 157

New Study ..... 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277,
278, 279, 280

Not show the .......................................................... 216

Newton ...................................................................... 12

NOTE 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 95, 121, 151, 152, 155, 169,
185, 193, 202, 206, 239, 241

NF .......................................................................... 197

Notepad ......................................................... 264, 266

NFBC ..................................................................... 161

NOTES ................................................... 112, 113, 276

NO.................................................................. 138, 192

Nter ........................................................................ 248

No default ............................................................... 263


No magnetizing ...................................................... 143

O
OC............................................................................ 70

297

EMS User Guide

Oercivity ......................................................... 143, 147

Of Maxwell's ............................................................. 22

Of 2D ........................................................................ 17

Of Motion Study ....................................................... 80

Of 3D...................................................................... 216

Of performing ........................................................... 67

Of AC Magnetic ................................................ 91, 119

Of plot .................................................................... 216

Of adding a ............................................................ 174

Of probing .............................................................. 255

Of all ferromagnetic ................................................ 143

Of producing 2D ..................................................... 234

Of band .................................................................... 81

Of producing this .................................................... 216

Of Colors ................................................................ 244

Of specifying .......................................................... 148

Of computing ............................................................ 15

Of specifying the .................................................... 149

Of cooling ................................................................. 78

Of splitting the .......................................................... 48

Of cooling states that the ......................................... 79

Of Study 1 you ....................................................... 214

Of coupling an EMS ................................................. 81

Of Study Results......................................................... 17

Of creating a........................................................... 260

Of subdividing the .................................................. 101

Of dividing the .......................................................... 91

Of toolbars ............................................................. 267

Of ej ....................................................................... 185

Of vacuum .............................................................. 136

Of electromagnetic ..................................... 20, 21, 185

Of values ................................................................ 151

Of EMS .................................................. 109, 117, 169

Of viewing .............................................................. 267

Of EMS Curve ........................................ 152, 153, 178

Ohmic Loss.................................................. 17, 54, 227

Of EMS Manager ................................................... 214

Ohmic, Eddy .............................................................. 12

Of finding the .................................................. 185, 188

Ohms/Square ......................................................... 167

Of fixing the ............................................................ 148

Ois the...................................................................... 27

Of generating an .................................................... 199

OK . 131, 145, 147, 152, 206, 238, 261, 267, 268, 271,
272, 273, 274, 275

Of improving the ....................................................... 94


Omega ................... 219, 222, 223, 224, 225, 228, 229
Of iso...................................................................... 241
Ompute Circuit Parameters .................................... 199
Of loading ................................................................. 27
On Create .............................. 145, 146, 147, 148, 149
Of Loads and Restraints ........................................ 167
On define the.......................................... 28, 36, 44, 53
Of magnetisation .................................................... 136
298

Index

On editing ............................................... 235, 236, 261

Or moving it ............................................................ 114

On File ................................................... 147, 235, 236

Or PropertyManager to ..................................................5

On OK .................................................................... 261

Or push the New .................................................... 153

On Plane1 ........................................................ 98, 104

Or saved to ................................................................ 17

On Report .............................................................. 213

Or Search.....................................................................5

On SaveAs button to .............................................. 243

Or Spherical ........................................................... 148

On Temperature ..................................................... 233

Or Tangential ........................................................... 97

Only conducting ....................................................... 30

Or Time Harmonic ............................................ 91, 119

Only Normal ............................................................. 97

Or windings to .......................................................... 81

Only orthotropic ...................................................... 149

Orthotropic ............................. 40, 49, 58, 98, 104, 138

Options .. 105, 145, 205, 206, 253, 254, 261, 267, 268,
269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276

Orthotropic Material........................................ 138, 149


Orthotropic Properties ............................................ 138

Meshing .............................................................. 205


Defining .............................................................. 138
Options dialog ........................................................ 276
Orthotropic under Relative Permeability ................. 149
OR ..............................................................................5
Other conducting .............................................. 91, 119
Or Btu ................................................................. 78, 79
Other electromagnetic .............................................. 30
Or create a ............................................................. 151
Other EMS ........................................................... 2, 12
Or Current Flow................................................ 91, 119
Other hand ............................................................. 170
Or drag the ............................. 271, 272, 273, 274, 275
Other words ................................................... 106, 185
Or driving the............................................................ 81
Or Electric Conductivity .......................................... 149

Others . 21, 25, 30, 49, 54, 91, 98, 103, 113, 136, 140,
144, 147, 151, 155, 157, 169, 170, 190, 199, 201,
226, 236, 259, 269, 276

Or Electric Field................................................ 91, 119


Output of AC Magnetic Analysis............................... 54
Or enter a ............................................................... 178
Output of Electric Conduction Analysis .................... 37
Or entering it .............................................................. 12
Output of Electrostatic Analysis ............................... 29
Or Gaussian ............................................... 40, 58, 147
Output of Magnetostatic Analysis ............................. 45
Or Gray Scale ........................................................ 244
Output of Motion Analysis ........................................ 87
Or Image Files........................................................ 257
Output of Thermal Analysis ...................................... 68
299

EMS User Guide

Output of Transient Magnetic Analysis ..................... 64

Play to file .............................................................. 242

Overview .....................................................................7

Plot ................................................................. 216, 248

Renaming ........................................................... 248

Paraffin Wax............................................................. 72

Results ............................................................... 216

Parameter ...................................................... 202, 214

Plot Legend ............................................................ 253

Meshing .............................................................. 202

Customizing ........................................................ 253

Paste .............................................................. 112, 250

Plot Motion Time Step ............................................ 220

Patrick Street.......................................................... 282

Plot Motion Time Step Sets the .............. 218, 219, 221

P-B Curve .............................................................. 151

Plot PropertyManager ............ 220, 222, 223, 224, 226

Performing ........................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 67, 81

Plot Step Sets the . 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228,
229, 230, 231, 232

AC Magnetic Analysis........................................... 53
Plot Subtitle .................................................... 253, 278
Electric Conduction Analysis ................................ 36
Plot Title ......................................................... 251, 253
Electrostatic Analysis............................................ 28
Magnetostatic Analysis ......................................... 44

Plot Type219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 231,
232

Motion Analysis .................................................... 81

PM.......................................... 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

Thermal Analysis .................................................. 67

Point ............................................................... 190, 236

Transient Magnetic Analysis ................................. 63

Point Probing.......................................................... 256

Permanent Magnet Data ........................................ 269

Poisson's .................................................................. 22

Permanent Magnetization ...................................... 148

Polyethylene HD ...................................................... 72

Permanent Magnets ....................... 40, 46, 49, 58, 148

Position/Format ...................................................... 244

Permanent Polarization .......................................... 136

Post Processor ....................................................... 256

Permeabilities......................................................... 136

Pr ............................................................................. 79

Permeabilities include ............................................ 136

Prandtl Number ........................................................ 79

PerTurn .................................................................. 171

Print Version........................................................... 260

PF .......................................................................... 197

Printing ................................................................... 246

Plane1 .............................................................. 98, 104

Result Plots ........................................................ 246

Plane2 .................................................................... 104

Probe ............................................. 235, 255, 256, 258

300

Index

Results ............................................................... 255

Renaming ............................................................... 248

Probed Result Plots ............................................... 235

Plot ..................................................................... 248

Processing ....................................................... 15, 237

Report .................................................... 103, 260, 261

Result Plots ........................................................ 237

Generating .......................................................... 103

Properties . 67, 121, 131, 163, 164, 165, 166, 190, 277

Report Background Color ....................................... 260

PropertyManager .. 121, 147, 156, 157, 159, 161, 162,


164, 165, 166, 180, 185, 191, 195, 204, 206, 207,
208, 210, 225, 227, 228, 229, 242, 244, 251, 276

Report File Format ................................................. 260

PTFE ........................................................................ 72

Required Input........................................................ 167

Pulse Current Source ............................................. 178

Required Input for AC Magnetic Analysis ................. 52

Pulse Voltage ......................................................... 178

Required Input for Electric Conduction Analysis ...... 35

PVC.......................................................................... 72

Required Input for Electrostatic Analysis .................. 27

Pyrex ........................................................................ 72

Required Input for Magnetostatic Analysis ............... 43

Report File Name ................................................... 260

Required Input for Transient Magnetic Analysis ....... 62

Qconvection ....................................................... 78, 79

Reset to .................................................................. 206

Quebec .................................................................. 282

Residual Induction.......................................... 136, 140

Residual Induction is .............................................. 136

R,f .......................................................................... 138

Resistance ..................................................... 193, 194

Rainbow ................................................................. 244

Resistance Calculation............................................. 34

Raphson ............................................................ 12, 125

Resistance Set ............................................... 195, 272

Reference Geometry ...................................... 148, 149

Responsibility to ....................................................... 81

Reference Plane .................................................... 239

Restraint .... 67, 93, 110, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160,
161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167

Reference Plane is ................................................. 239


Restraints and Loads ............................................... 97
Reference Point is .................................................. 239
Result Databases ................................................... 105
Relative Permeability ............................................. 136
Result Plot Between Studies .................................. 250
Relative Permittivity........................................ 136, 149
Result Plots .................... 103, 237, 238, 246, 247, 249
Remember that Force/Torque is ............................ 190
Printing ............................................................... 246
Remeshing ............................................................. 202
301

EMS User Guide

Processing .......................................................... 237

Rock Wool ................................................................ 72

Saving ........................................................ 103, 247

Run ........................................................ 102, 203, 206

Resultant Applied Current Density ....... 45, 54, 64, 224

Studies ............................................................... 102

Resultant Current Density .................. 54, 64, 221, 225

Run or .................................................................... 102

Resultant Electric Current Density ........................... 37

Resultant Electric Displacement....................... 29, 220

S1809..................................................................... 140

Resultant Electric Field .................. 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

S2712..................................................................... 140

Resultant Force ...................................................... 226

S2818..................................................................... 140

Resultant Force Density ......................... 29, 45, 54, 64

S3214..................................................................... 140

Resultant Heat Flux................................................ 232

Samarium Cobalt ................................................... 140

Resultant Magnetic Field .............................. 45, 54, 64

Same as Entry Port ................................ 171, 175, 181

Resultant Magnetic Flux Density .................. 45, 54, 64

Same as Entry Port in Exit Port ...................... 176, 178

Resultant Temperature ............................................ 68

Save all .................................................................. 247

Resultant Temperature Gradient ............................ 231

Save As .......................................... 103, 235, 236, 247

Results .. 103, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 216, 234, 236,
255

Saving .................................................... 103, 247, 254


Result Plots ................................................ 103, 247

Graphing ..................................................... 234, 236


Search .........................................................................5
Plotting ............................................................... 216
Section ................................................................... 239
Probing ............................................................... 255
Section 2 ................................................................ 239
Viewing ............................................................... 103
Section Clipping ..................................................... 239
Results Folder ........................................................ 113
Section Plane Center ............................................. 239
Results Table ........... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 114, 197, 199
Section Value Range ............................................. 239
Right View .............................................................. 265
Right-click the Load/Restraint .......... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Select Component Type 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224,


225, 226, 231, 232

Right-click Vt Curve and......................................... 152

Select Loss Type.................................................... 227

Right-mouse menus provide ............................ 93, 110

Select Results Table .............................................. 213

RMS ............................................................... 176, 181

Select Units ... 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225,
226, 227, 229, 230, 231, 232

302

Index

Self-inductance ...................................................... 199

Solid Coil ........................................................ 114, 181

Set Temperature .................................................... 163

Solid Folder ............................................................ 113

Set Units ........................................ 163, 164, 165, 166

Solids ............................................... 96, 135, 138, 150

Setting ............................................ 263, 264, 265, 266

SolidWorks ..... 12, 80, 81, 90, 112, 206, 229, 236, 257,
260, 277

Conclusion .......................................................... 266


SolidWorks 2012 ........................................................ 2
Description.......................................................... 264
SolidWorks by ........................................................ 260
Introduction ......................................................... 263
SolidWorks Configuration ....................................... 130
Model View ......................................................... 265
SolidWorks Help and SolidWorks Tutorials .............. 80
Several orders of .................................................... 197
SolidWorks Motion ................................................... 81
SFFM ........................................................................ 12
SolidWorks Motion to ............................................... 81
SFFM Current Source ............................................ 178
SolidWorks toolbar ................................................. 216
SFFM Voltage ........................................................ 178
Solidworks window enviromnent ............................ 261
Show Mesh ............................................................ 203
Some hints for .............................................................. 5
Show min ............................................................... 244
Some meshing ....................................................... 206
Show Report .......................................................... 260
Specifying ................................................................ 98
Show/Hide ...................................................... 239, 241
Directions.............................................................. 98
Show/Hide All ......................................................... 239
Spline Options ........................................................ 257
Show/Hide Mesh .................................................... 114
Spline Probing ........................................................ 257
SI 167
Split Core Loss ............................................. 12, 54, 126
Siemens ................................................................. 136
St 282
Sil-o-cel .................................................................... 72
Stainless Steel ................................................... 70, 72
Simplifications or ...................................................... 89
Start Time .............................................................. 127
Since EMS ............................................................... 81
Steady State Thermal .............. 67, 124, 125, 126, 127
Sinusoidal Current Source ..................................... 178
Study..... 17, 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 94, 102, 121, 132, 133
Sinusoidal Voltage ................................................. 178
Running .............................................................. 102
Skin Depth Calculation ............................................. 48
Study Name ........................................................... 112
SmCo ..................................................................... 140
303

EMS User Guide

Study Reports ........................................................ 259

TGr ................................................................... 68, 231

Study Types ........................................................... 119

TGx ........................................................................ 231

Study, or click EMS ................................................ 121

TGy .................................................................. 68, 231

Study1 .................................................................... 105

TGz .................................................................. 68, 231

StudyName ............................................................ 261

Than Check Show Mesh ........................................ 265

Styrofoam ................................................................. 72

Than NdFeB ........................................................... 140

Subfolder .......................................................... 93, 110

That caused the ..................................................... 210

Subfolders ........................................................ 93, 110

That constitute the.......................................... 190, 192

Such case .............................................. 125, 143, 171

That define a .................................................. 229, 236

Such class of ............................................................ 24

That defines the ................. 28, 30, 36, 44, 53, 63, 149

Such curve ......................................................... 40, 58

That describe the ..................................................... 20

Suite 300 ................................................................ 282

That electromagnetic ................................................ 21

Summary of Coils ................................................... 181

That encloses the ..................................................... 81

Summary of Forces ................................................ 192

That fills the .............................................................. 81

Summary of Plots ................................................... 233

That Force .............................................................. 190

Symbol ................................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

That gives the............................. 40, 58, 147, 171, 216

Symbol Settings ..................................................... 270

That govern the ........................................................ 20

System Options .............................................. 267, 268

That issued the....................................................... 267

That lead ................................................................ 100

Tc ........................................................................... 140

That need ......................................................... 91, 216

Temperature................................................... 163, 230

That produces a ..................................................... 169

Temperature Gradient ...................................... 68, 231

That relates the ...................................................... 136

Temperature Gradient and Heat Flux..................... 233

That's what makes ................................................. 140

Tetra 4 ...................................................................... 94

The 2D ........................................................... 236, 257

Tf 78, 79

The 2D Plot .................................................... 235, 236

Tf is .......................................................................... 79

The 3D ............................................................. 15, 278

TG ............................................................................ 68

The AC...................................................................... 12

304

Index

The AC Magnetic ......................... 46, 48, 49, 126, 138

The Circuit Parameters .......................................... 199

The AC Magnetic Analysis ....................................... 46

The clipping ............................................................ 239

The Accurate Curvature Representation ................ 276

The Coercivity ........................................................ 148

The Add ................................................................. 265

The Coils .................................. 99, 169, 175, 176, 178

The Animate ........................................................... 242

The Coils PropertyManager ................... 175, 176, 178

The Applied Current Density .................................. 224

The Color ............................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

The Applied Current Density Plot PropertyManager


........................................................................... 224

The Color Chart...................................................... 278


The Company................................................. 254, 262

The Author ............................................................. 262


The Compare Studies dialog Popup ...................... 214
The Author Name ................................................... 254
The Compare Studies Results ............................... 214
The Automatic ........................................................ 211
The Compare Studies Results dialog by ................ 214
The Automatic Looping for ..................................... 276
The Components and Bodies for Forces ................ 190
The AWG .......................................... 12, 175, 176, 178
The B ..................................................................... 143

The Components and Bodies for Mesh Control ....207,


208

The Band ................................................................. 81

The Components and Bodies for Resistance ......... 194

The Band is .............................................................. 81

The Components or Bodies ................... 163, 164, 166

The better the ......................................................... 101

The Components or Bodies for Charge Density ..... 159

The Br ............................................................ 136, 140

The Components or Bodies for Coils ..... 175, 176, 178

The Browse for Folder.................................... 145, 268

The Components or Bodies for Floating Conductor


........................................................................... 157

The Bulk Ambient Temperature ............................. 164


The Components or Bodies for Total Charge ......... 160
The case ................................................................ 100
The Components or Bodies for Voltage ................. 156
The case of Magnetostatic ........................................... 12
The Compute ................................................. 228, 229
The cause of .......................................................... 211
The Compute button ...................................... 228, 229
The Charge Density ............................................... 159
The Compute Flux PropertyManager ..................... 228
The Chart Options .................................................. 244
The Compute Voltage PropertyManager ................ 229
The Chart Options PropertyManager ..................... 244
The Conclusion ...................................................... 266
The Chart Options PropertyManager to ................. 244
The conducting........................................... 48, 99, 169

305

EMS User Guide

The Contact Resistance ......................................... 158

The Direct .............................................. 123, 124, 125

The Contact Resistance PropertyManager ............ 158

The Direction .......................................................... 148

The contents .......................................................... 260

The Direction Type ................................................. 148

The Convection ...................................................... 164

The display .... 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226,
231, 232, 244

The Convection PropertyManager to ..................... 164


The display of ................................................. 242, 267
The Coordinate System ................................. 148, 149
The DOFs ................................................................ 91
The Copy ............................................................... 250
The driving ............................................................... 99
The corresponding .... 67, 96, 131, 135, 144, 145, 146,
149, 162, 180, 191, 195, 216, 252, 258

The Eddy ........................................................ 126, 170

The corresponding icon.......................................... 144

The effect ......................................................... 87, 197

The corresponding PropertyManager..... 155, 169, 193

The effects of ..................................... 46, 80, 199, 203

The Cover Page ..................................................... 262

The Electric Conduction ..... 30, 81, 100, 124, 188, 194

The Current ............................................ 175, 176, 178

The Electric Displacement ..................................... 220

The Current Density ............................................... 225

The Electric Displacement Plot PropertyManager .. 220

The Current Density Plot PropertyManager ... 221, 225

The Electric Field Plot PropertyManager ................ 219

The Curve Data ...................................................... 152

The Electric Potential Plot PropertyManager ......... 218

The Curve Library .......................... 147, 152, 153, 178

The electromagnetic..................................... 66, 67, 81

The Curve Name .................................................... 152

The electromagnetic and electromechanical ............ 19

The Curve Preview................................................. 178

The electromagnetic devices such as ...................... 21

The Date ................................................................ 262

The Electrostatic ............................................ 123, 136

The Default Options ............................................... 276

The Electrostatic and Electric Conduction .............. 138

The Define Study Name ......................................... 112

The Element Growth Rate ...................... 207, 208, 276

The Delete button to............................................... 265

The Element Size ........................................... 207, 208

The Delete key or ................................................... 152

The EMS ..................................................... 1, 2, 81, 89

The demagnetization.............................................. 143

The EMS Analysis Manager .. 145, 267, 268, 271, 272,


273, 274, 275, 276, 277

The Description ...................................................... 264


The EMS AnalysisManager .................................... 267
The design ............................................................. 140
The EMS Loads toolbar ......................... 175, 176, 178
306

Index

The EMS Manager .. 26, 27, 28, 36, 42, 44, 51, 53, 61,
63, 93, 94, 97, 99, 102, 103, 105, 110, 111, 112,
113, 121, 129, 130, 131, 132, 144, 145, 146, 147,
148, 149, 152, 153, 155, 162, 169, 180, 185, 191,
193, 195, 202, 203, 204, 206, 207, 208, 213, 216,
235, 236, 238, 243, 244, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250,
251, 256, 257, 259, 260, 261, 269

The floating ................................................. 12, 25, 157


The Floating Conductor.......................................... 157
The flow ................................................................... 78
The flow of ............................................................... 79

The EMS Manager is ....................................... 93, 110


The Flux ................................................................. 228
The EMS Manager tree .......................................... 185
The EMS Online User's Guide ............................... 2, 5
The EMS toolbar ... 102, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161,
163, 164, 165, 166, 190, 194, 256

The following .. 3, 17, 19, 26, 27, 29, 37, 38, 40, 42, 43,
45, 49, 51, 53, 54, 58, 61, 62, 63, 64, 70, 72, 78, 79,
81, 89, 90, 91, 94, 101, 102, 108, 111, 117, 118,
119, 121, 123, 128, 131, 150, 151, 155, 163, 164,
165, 166, 167, 169, 171, 178, 181, 185, 190, 192,
193, 202, 204, 209, 213, 214, 216, 241, 242, 247,
254, 255, 256, 257, 268, 270, 276

The ends ................................................................ 199


The following button ............................................... 239
The Entry Port ........................................................ 171
The following toolbar .............................................. 114
The Entry Port and ......................................... 171, 181
The Font ................................................................. 253
The existing ............................................................... 12
The Force Density .................................................. 226
The existing SolidWorks......................................... 112
The Force Density Plot PropertyManager .............. 226
The Exit Port .................................................. 171, 181
The Forces ............................. 28, 44, 53, 63, 185, 190
The Faces ........................................ 78, 163, 165, 228
The Function Curves .............................. 152, 153, 178
The Faces for Contact Resistance ......................... 158
The Function Curves dialog ................................... 151
The Faces for Entry Port ................ 175, 176, 178, 194
The Global Coordinate System .............................. 104
The Faces for Exit Port .................. 175, 176, 178, 194
The Global Size and Tolerance .............................. 206
The Faces for Floating Conductor .......................... 157
The Heat Flux................................................. 165, 232
The Faces for Mesh Control ........................... 207, 208
The Heat Flux Plot PropertyManager ..................... 232
The Faces for Normal Flux ..................................... 161
The Heat Flux PropertyManager ............................ 165
The Faces for Voltage ............................................ 156
The html ................................................................. 259
The Failure Diagnostics ......................................... 210
The hysteresis ........................................................ 143
The Failure Diagnostics tool to ............................... 211
The influence.......................................................... 143
The FeatureManager ........... 81, 93, 98, 104, 110, 244
The Introduction ..................................................... 263
The Finite Element Method .............................. 91, 201
The Iso 2 ................................................................ 241
The Fixed Voltage .................................................. 156
307

EMS User Guide

The Iso Clipping PropertyManager......................... 241

The Magnetostatic.................................... 48, 125, 136

The Iterative ........................................... 123, 124, 125

The Magnetostatic Analysis ..................................... 38

The lack of ..................................................... 102, 128

The Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic ........... 138

The layer .................................................................. 78

The Manager .......................................... 185, 193, 216

The left ................................................... 111, 244, 279

The Material ..................... 96, 135, 145, 146, 148, 149

The Legend ............................................................ 253

The Material Database ... 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

The level of .............................................. 91, 119, 171

The Material PM ............................................. 144, 147

The listing ............................................... 235, 236, 243

The Maxwell Stress Method ........................... 185, 188

The listing PropertyManager .................................. 243

The Mesh Control........................................... 207, 208

The Load ... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 67, 113, 155, 156, 157,
158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166

The Mesh Control PropertyManager .............. 207, 208


The Mesh icon........................................................ 276

The Local Coordinate System ........................ 148, 149


The Mesh icon and. 202, 203, 204, 206, 207, 208, 210
The look ......................................................... 244, 279
The Mesh PropertyManager .................................. 202
The Lorentz ............................................................ 233
The mesher .................................... 120, 205, 210, 276
The Lorentz Force Method ............................. 185, 188
The mesher to ........................................................ 204
The Lorentz Force or JxB Method .................. 185, 188
The meshing ............................ 15, 204, 206, 210, 276
The Loss ................................................................ 227
The MKS ................................................ 107, 193, 197
The Losses Density................................................ 227
The model ...................................... 22, 30, 46, 81, 216
The Losses Density Plot PropertyManager ............ 227
The model for............................................................. 17
The Magnetic ................................................. 169, 199
The Model View ..................................................... 265
The Magnetic Field................................................. 223
The Modified Newton ............................................. 125
The Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results ........ 269
The Motion Analysis ................................................. 87
The Magnetic Field Plot PropertyManager ............. 223
The Magnetic Flux Density ............................. 113, 222

The Motion Study tab and click Create New Motion


Study .................................................................... 81

The Magnetic Flux Density Plot PropertyManager . 222

The MotionManager ................................................. 81

The Magnetization.................................................. 148

The Motor ................................................................. 81

The magnetizing..................................................... 143

The Move Up or Move Down ................................. 265

308

Index

The moving ...................................................... 81, 185

The Plot you ........................................................... 246

The names ..................................................... 121, 216

The Point ................................................................ 152

The nanofarad ........................................................ 197

The Point for Torque Center .................................. 190

The need ................................................................ 216

The point of ............................................................ 256

The Net Current ..................................................... 175

The Point Probing .................................................. 256

The Net RMS Current ............................................ 176

The Preview ................................................... 153, 260

The Newton's ........................................................... 78

The Probe Section ................................................. 256

The Normal Flux..................................................... 161

The Probe tool........................................................ 256

The Normal to Plane 1 ........................................... 104

The Probe tool to.................................................... 256

The number of100, 101, 125, 170, 171, 175, 176, 178,
199

The Probing ........................................... 235, 256, 258

The operating ......................................................... 143

The PropertyManager ... 107, 133, 238, 271, 272, 273,


274, 275

The option of.............................................................. 12

The range of ................................................... 239, 241

The option to .......................................................... 107

The rank ................................................................. 261

The Options .. 253, 254, 261, 269, 271, 272, 273, 274,
275

The rate .................................................................. 199


The rate of .................................................. 70, 78, 136

The Options button................................................. 202


The Relative Permeability ...................................... 147
The Options dialog ......................................... 204, 206
The Remanence..................................................... 148
The order of ........................................................... 244
The Report 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 103, 259, 260, 261, 277
The Origin .............................................................. 104
The Report dialog................................................... 260
The orthotropic ............................................... 138, 149
The Report file........................................................ 261
The part .................................. 271, 272, 273, 274, 275
The report of........................................................... 277
The part or ............................... 98, 104, 105, 112, 267
The Report Wizard ................................................. 260
The Permanent Magnet Data ................................. 269
The Residual .................................................. 136, 140
The plane of ........................................................... 161
The Resistance .............................................. 193, 194
The Plot .................................................. 252, 253, 254
The Resistance PropertyManager.......................... 194
The plot or ...................................................... 235, 236
The Resistance Settings .......................................... 36
The Plot Results ..................................................... 216
309

EMS User Guide

The Results ............................................ 105, 170, 277

The study ....................................................... 121, 277

The Results Folder ................................................. 113

The Study 1 ............................................................ 214

The RMS Current ................................................... 176

The Study icon and ................................................ 203

The rule of ................................................................ 48

The Study Name .................................................... 112

The same circuit ..................................................... 199

The Study Report and .................................... 197, 199

The Save As................................................... 247, 258

The subfolders ................................................. 93, 110

The Search ...................................................................5

The surface .................................. 22, 48, 79, 185, 188

The Section PropertyManager ............................... 239

The Symbol ............................ 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

The Set File ............................................................ 259

The System Options............................................... 267

The Setting for........................ 262, 263, 264, 265, 266

The Table of Contents or ...............................................7

The Settings for ...................................................... 260

The table or ............................................................ 147

The Show min ........................................................ 252

The Temperature ........................................... 166, 230

The Skin Depth ........................................................ 48

The Temperature Gradient ..................................... 231

The Skin in Depth..................................................... 48

The Temperature Gradient Plot PropertyManager . 231

The Solids ................................ 96, 135, 144, 147, 150

The Temperature Plot PropertyManager ................ 230

The Solids Folder ................................................... 113

The Temperature PropertyManager ....................... 163

The SolidWorks ........................................ 81, 105, 112

The Thermal Conductivity ...................................... 136

The SolidWorks Motion ............................................ 80

The Title ................................................................. 262

The SolidWorks window ................................. 244, 246

The TOC .....................................................................5

The SolidWorks window is ..................................... 246

The Torque Center ................................................. 190

The SolidWorks window to ..................................... 246

The Total Charge ................................................... 160

The Spline Probing................................................. 257

The Total Charge PropertyManager....................... 160

The Spline Probing is ............................................. 257

The Transient Analysis in ............................................ 12

The Spline Probing PropertyManager .................... 257

The Transient Magnetic ............................. 56, 67, 127

The Split Core Loss................................................ 227

The Transient Magnetostatic .................................... 56

The starting ............................................ 127, 235, 236

The Treat ............................................................... 106

The Studies list....................................................... 214

The Turns ............................................... 175, 176, 178

310

Index

The Type of Study .................................................... 81

They know the ........................................................ 233

The undeformed ..................................................... 256

They represent the ................................................... 99

The underlying ......................................................... 19

They represent the discretized ............................... 216

The Units ................................................................ 269

Thick, Normal ......................................................... 244

The value ............... 148, 158, 159, 160, 175, 176, 258

This Iso .................................................................. 241

The value of ................................................... 143, 170

This Lorentz ................................................... 185, 188

The view the ........................................................... 269

This option ..................................... 123, 124, 125, 280

The view to ............................................................. 265

This option for ................................................ 244, 279

The Virtual Work Method ............................... 185, 188

This option to.................................................. 211, 257

The Voltage ............................................................ 156

This release to EMS's 5 .................................................7

The Volume Heat ................................................... 166

This subfolder................................................... 93, 110

The Volume Heat PropertyManager....................... 166

Through 2D ............................................................... 17

Then choose a ....................................................... 267

Through EMS's .......................................................... 12

Then define a ......................................................... 138

Time Curve ............................................................ 178

Then Magnetostatic is .............................................. 48

Time Duration......................................................... 127

Then remeshing the ............................................... 106

Time Increment ...................................................... 127

Then select a.......................................................... 190

Tin Sn ....................................................................... 72

Then select the...... 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163,
164, 165, 166, 175, 176, 178, 190, 194, 207, 208,
228

Tips ........................................................................ 211

Thermal .................................... 67, 163, 164, 165, 166

To AC Magnetic ......................................... 46, 91, 119

Thermal Analysis ................................................. 12, 67

To account ............................................................. 143

Performing ............................................................ 67

To achieve the.......................................................... 94

Thermal Conductivity ............................................. 136

To activate a SolidWorks ....................................... 130

Thermal Load ......................................................... 167

To activate the........................................................ 216

These meshing....................................................... 276

To add ...................................................................... 67

These opposing...................................................... 199

To add a ................. 146, 152, 174, 175, 176, 178, 251

They exhibit a ......................................................... 140

To animate the ....................................................... 242

Meshing .............................................................. 211

311

EMS User Guide

To assign a ............................................................ 144

To demagnetization................................................ 140

To attract or ............................................................ 140

To determine the .............................................. 91, 119

To browse the ........................................................ 261

To display a .................................................................3

To calculate the .............................................. 102, 256

To display a tool ..................................................... 114

To change .............................................................. 244

To display the ......................................................... 267

To change a ........................................................... 267

To Drag .................................................................. 113

To change the123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 145, 235, 236,


261, 265, 268, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 277

To drive the .............................................................. 80


To edit .................................................................... 152

To change the Symbol ........... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275


To edit an ............................................................... 238
To check for ........................................................... 106
To EMS .................................................................... 80
To check or ............................................................ 206
To enter a ....................................................... 152, 153
To check the..................................................... 94, 206
To enter the ............................................................ 163
To close the ........................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275
To exclude an existant ................................................. 12
To compute a ......................................... 28, 44, 53, 63
To execute a tool.................................................... 114
To compute the .............................. 197, 199, 228, 229
To existing ................................................................ 15
To consider the ...................................................... 203
To expand the item and ......................................... 111
To copy a ............................................................... 250
To export the .................................................. 235, 236
To copy the .................................................... 235, 236
To fix the ................................................................ 148
To create a ............................... 94, 112, 121, 145, 152
To generate a ........... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 235, 236, 261
To create the .......................................................... 121
To generate a 2 ...................................................... 256
To customize the ............................................ 103, 253
To get ..................................................... 35, 43, 52, 62
To decide a ............................................................ 185
To give a ................................................................ 216
To define a 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 94, 148, 152, 178, 190,
239

To Help .......................................................................5

To define a Vt ......................................................... 152

To identify a ........................................................... 210

To define an Iso ..................................................... 241

To identify the......................................................... 210

To define the ............................................ 80, 149, 155

To increase the ...................................................... 125

To delete a ..................................... 121, 132, 152, 249

To increment or ...................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

312

Index

To insert an ............................................................ 145

To see the ...................................................... 235, 236

To instruct the ........................................................ 206

To select a ............................................................. 253

To locate a ...................................................................5

To select or unselect all ......................................... 214

To make ................................................................. 170

To send the ............................................................ 246

To make a ................................................................ 94

To set a .................................................................. 211

To model a ............................................................. 161

To set the 27, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 253, 261, 262,
269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

To modify a ............................................ 180, 191, 195


To set the Default Library ....................................... 268
To modify the ........................................... 27, 131, 265
To set the General ................................................. 267
To move the toolbar ............................................... 114
To set the Model View............................................ 265
To obtain a ................................................................. 12
To share a .............................................................. 259
To perform a Magnetostatic ............................... 43, 44
To show a .............................................................. 260
To perform a Transient Magnetic ....................... 62, 63
To perform an AC Magnetic ............................... 52, 53

To show the .. 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226,
231, 232

To perform an Electric Conduction ........................... 35

To SolidWorks ....................................................... 7, 89

To perform an Electrostatic ...................................... 27

To SolidWorks Motion .............................................. 80

To plot a ................................................. 26, 42, 51, 61

To SolidWorks Motion is straightforward and ........... 81

To plot the .............................................. 230, 231, 232

To specify a .................................................... 147, 171

To probe a .............................................................. 256

To specify an Entry Port and Exit Port ................... 171

To remove a ........................................................... 260

To specify the ............... 28, 36, 98, 104, 145, 149, 194

To Remove an........................................................ 265

To start a .................................................................. 81

To rename a ........................................................... 248

To start the ............................................................. 103

To request the .................................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

To start the Report ................................................. 259

To run a .......................................................... 102, 203

To studies .............................................................. 250

To run the ............................................................... 206

To suppress the........................................................... 12

To save a ............................................................... 103

To test the ................................................................ 94

To save an ............................................................. 247

To think of ........................................................ 90, 136

To save the .................................... 152, 235, 236, 242

To track the .................................................... 235, 236


313

EMS User Guide

To transfer the ........................................................ 105

Transient Magnetic Options ................................... 127

To treat the ....................................................... 25, 157

Trimetric View ........................................................ 265

To turn the ...................................................... 235, 236

Ts ....................................................................... 78, 79

To update the ......................................................... 257

Turns ...................................................... 175, 176, 181

To view a ................................................................ 153

Txt .................................................. 243, 256, 257, 258

To view or .............................................................. 121

Type the ................................................................. 175

To view the ............... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 214, 243, 265

Typical Magnetic Properties of AlNiCo ................... 140

To write a ............................................................... 264

Typical Magnetic Properties of Ferrite.................... 140

To write or ...................................................... 263, 266

Typical Magnetic Properties of NdFeB ................... 140

Toll-Free ................................................................. 282

Typical Magnetic Properties of SmCo .................... 140

Tool Tip .................................................................. 114

Toolbar ........................................................... 114, 216

Under Analysis ....................................................... 121

Toolbar by .............................................................. 114

Under Automatic .................................................... 204

Toolbar is ............................................................... 216

Under Chart Options .............................................. 244

Toolbars ......................................................... 114, 216

Under Color Options .............................................. 244

Tools ...................................................................... 211

Under Control Parameters ............................. 207, 208

Top View ................................................................ 265

Under Convection .................................................. 164

Torques .......... 28, 44, 53, 63, 185, 190, 191, 192, 274

Under Display Options ........................................... 252

Torques folder ........................................................ 185

Under Heat Flux ..................................................... 165

Torques PropertyManager ..................................... 190

Under Legend Options ........................................... 244

Total Charge .......................................................... 160

Under Mesh Parameters ........................................ 206

Transient ........................................................... 12, 127

Under Property ....................................................... 251

Transient Analysis ...................................................... 12

Under Report Format ............................................. 261

Transient Magnetic 17, 91, 93, 110, 111, 119, 138, 167,
171, 181, 192, 233

Under Results Folder ............................................. 131


Under Study ........................................................... 121

Transient Magnetic Analysis .................................... 63


Under Symbol Settings .......... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275
Performing ............................................................ 63
Under Temperature ................................................ 163
314

Index

Under User Information .......................................... 254

Viewing .................................................. 103, 114, 213

Under Volume Heat................................................ 166

Analysis Results ................................................. 213

Units ....................................................................... 269

Results ............................................................... 103

Unix .......................................................................... 17

Virtual Work............................................................ 192

Until Section 2 is ............................................ 239, 241

Virtual Work or Lorentz Force ................................ 190

Use Animation to ...................................................... 80

Voltage ..................................................................... 25

Use Basic Motion for ................................................ 80

Voltage and Flux ........................................................ 17

Use Iso 2 and Iso 3 to ............................................ 241

Voltage Driven........................................................ 181

Use Motion Analysis................................................. 80

Voltage Driven Coil ................................ 175, 176, 178

Use Motion Analysis for ........................................... 80

Volume Heat .......................................... 114, 166, 167

Use Motion Analysis to............................................. 80

Vt Curve ................................................................. 151

Use PropertyManager ...................................... 93, 110

Use Section 2 and Section 3 to .............................. 239

W/m.................................................................... 70, 72

Use Steinmetz ............................................................ 12

Was required for ......................................................... 12

Uses ... 3, 5, 21, 28, 36, 44, 48, 53, 63, 91, 93, 94, 107,
110, 111, 112, 113, 119, 120, 123, 124, 125, 126,
127, 129, 144, 150, 151, 152, 163, 164, 166, 188,
199, 203, 206, 211, 214, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222,
223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 230, 231, 232, 235, 239,
241, 244, 256, 271, 273, 274, 275, 276, 278, 279

We attempt to ......................................................... 185

Using Design Studies ............................................... 94

Web Page .............................................................. 283

Using Drag and Drop to Define Materials ............... 150

Were applied by a .................................................... 81

Using SolidWorks ..................................................... 80

What is AC Magnetic Analysis ................................. 46

Uto-insert Air part ..................................................... 15

What is Electric Conduction Analysis ....................... 30

We calculate the............................................. 185, 188


We make the .......................................................... 169

What is Electrostatic Analysis .................................. 22

Value Range .......................................................... 241

What is Low Frequency Electromagnetics ............... 21

clipping ............................................................... 241

What is Magnetostatic Analysis................................ 38

Variation with.......................................................... 151

What Is Motion Analysis ........................................... 80

View Toolbar .......................................................... 216

What is Thermal Analysis ......................................... 66


What is Transient Magnetic Analysis ....................... 56
315

EMS User Guide

What's .................................................................... 267

With respect ........................................... 175, 176, 178

What's New..................................................................7

With SolidWorks Motion to ....................................... 81

What's New in EMS 2012..............................................7

Without consideration of ........................................... 81

What's Wrong Messages ....................................... 267

World Wide Web .................................................... 283

When checked ....................................... 205, 244, 276

Wound and Solid Coils ........................................... 170

When checking an.................................................... 94

Wound Coil .................................................... 114, 181

When creating an EMS ............................................ 81

Wound or Solid....................................... 175, 176, 178

When electromagnetic ............................................. 20

When Front or Right ............................................... 239

X,y ............................................................................ 79

When Front or Top ................................................. 239

X,yz ........................................................................ 138

When meshing ............................................... 111, 210

Xls .................................................. 243, 256, 257, 258

When meshing an .................................................. 211

X-Orientation .......................................................... 239

When performing Electrostatic or Conduction ............... 12

When specifying a .................................................. 269

YES ................................................................ 138, 192

When specifying the ............................................... 269

Y-Orientation .......................................................... 239

When Thermal Solution.......................... 37, 45, 54, 64

You accomplish the .................................................. 90

When Top or Right ................................................. 239

You back to Coils PropertyManager....................... 178

When working with ................................................. 106

You ca .................................................................... 214

Where EMS .............................................................. 95

You change the ...................................................... 206

Which forces the ...................................................... 22

You change the Result file ..................................... 259

Which gives an ......................................................... 48

You checked a ............................................... 148, 149

Which play an................................................... 91, 119

You choose a ........................................................... 68

Which solves the ...................................................... 89

You complete a ........................................................ 95

Wide, Normal ......................................................... 279

You create a ....................................... 27, 96, 135, 155

Wireframe .............................................. 239, 241, 270

You create a Magnetic ..................................... 99, 169

With AC Magnetic .................................................... 48

You display the............................................... 256, 257

With EMS's................................................................ 12

You double the ....................................................... 138

316

Index

You drag a Magnetic Flux Density Plot icon ........... 113

You specify the............................................... 244, 260

You drag a toolbar.................................................. 114

You take an ............................................................ 100

You follow the......................................................... 100

You view the........................................................... 213

You increase the .................................................... 246

You want ................ 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 163, 206

You know the ......................................................... 171

You want the .......................................... 125, 126, 127

You modify the ....................................................... 155

You want to ..... 80, 114, 123, 126, 156, 157, 158, 159,
160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 175, 176, 178,
180, 181, 191, 195, 207, 208, 228, 229, 248, 249,
250, 261, 277

You need the .................................... 27, 35, 43, 52, 62


You need to .............................................. 90, 138, 214
You probe a ........................................................... 258
You reduce the ....................................................... 161
You run a ................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 102, 129, 133
You save the .......................................... 256, 257, 258
You set an .............................................................. 263
You set the ............................................................. 277
You specify a.......................................................... 260

You write a ............................................................. 266


Your Model ............................................................. 144
Ypical ....................................................................... 56
Z
Zinc Zn ..................................................................... 72
Z-Orientation .......................................................... 239

F .......................................................................... 197

317

Вам также может понравиться